[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024010025A1 - Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound - Google Patents

Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024010025A1
WO2024010025A1 PCT/JP2023/024884 JP2023024884W WO2024010025A1 WO 2024010025 A1 WO2024010025 A1 WO 2024010025A1 JP 2023024884 W JP2023024884 W JP 2023024884W WO 2024010025 A1 WO2024010025 A1 WO 2024010025A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
compound
compounds
formula
resin
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2023/024884
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
信哉 西
拓也 鶴田
英知 古山
祐一 安原
諒介 遠藤
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Priority to JP2024532604A priority Critical patent/JPWO2024010025A1/ja
Publication of WO2024010025A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024010025A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/44Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F20/00Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride, ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F265/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00
    • C08F265/04Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00 on to polymers of esters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L51/00Compositions of graft polymers in which the grafted component is obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • C08L51/06Compositions of graft polymers in which the grafted component is obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers grafted on to homopolymers or copolymers of aliphatic hydrocarbons containing only one carbon-to-carbon double bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B55/00Azomethine dyes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B67/00Influencing the physical, e.g. the dyeing or printing properties of dyestuffs without chemical reactions, e.g. by treating with solvents grinding or grinding assistants, coating of pigments or dyes; Process features in the making of dyestuff preparations; Dyestuff preparations of a special physical nature, e.g. tablets, films
    • C09B67/006Preparation of organic pigments
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a colored composition containing a coloring agent.
  • the present invention also relates to a film, a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, an image display device, and a compound using the colored composition.
  • color filters are used as key devices for displays and optical elements.
  • a color filter usually includes pixels of three primary colors, red, green, and blue, and serves to separate transmitted light into the three primary colors.
  • the colored pixels of each color of the color filter are manufactured using a colored composition containing a coloring agent.
  • Coloring compositions containing colorants are used in various fields other than color filters.
  • Patent Document 1 describes an electrophotographic toner containing a metal complex compound having a specific structure. Are listed.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a colored composition capable of forming a film with excellent moisture resistance, a film obtained from the colored composition, a color filter having the above film, a solid-state imaging device having the above color filter, and an image display device. That's true.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide novel compounds.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • the coloring composition includes a compound Y in which the compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.
  • R 1 represents a substituent
  • X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure.
  • X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x
  • R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.
  • X 2 is CR 2 and the above R 1 and the above R 2 are bonded to form a ring structure, or the above R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms.
  • ⁇ 3> The colored composition according to ⁇ 1>, wherein R 1 is a substituent containing an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • R 1 is a substituent containing an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • the metal atom contains Cu, Zn, Ni, Pd, Ti, Mn, Co, Al, or Fe.
  • ⁇ 5> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, further comprising at least one selected from a green colorant and a red colorant.
  • ⁇ 6> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, further comprising a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
  • ⁇ 7> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, which is for forming a color filter.
  • ⁇ 8> A film obtained from the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>.
  • ⁇ 9> A color filter having the film according to ⁇ 8>.
  • ⁇ 10> A solid-state image sensor or image display device having the color filter according to ⁇ 9>.
  • R 1 represents a substituent
  • X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure.
  • X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x
  • R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.
  • a colored composition capable of forming a film with excellent moisture resistance, a film obtained from the colored composition, a color filter having the above film, a solid-state imaging device having the above color filter, and an image display device. be able to. Further, according to the present invention, a novel compound can be provided.
  • is used to include the numerical values described before and after it as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the description that does not indicate substituted or unsubstituted includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group).
  • the term "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • the light used for exposure include actinic rays or radiation such as the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • EUV light extreme ultraviolet rays
  • (meth)acrylate” represents acrylate and/or methacrylate
  • (meth)acrylic represents both acrylic and/or methacrylic
  • (meth)acrylate” represents acrylic and/or methacrylate.
  • Acryloyl refers to either or both of acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • Me in the structural formula represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • a pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
  • the term "process” is used not only to refer to an independent process, but also to include a process in which the intended effect of the process is achieved even if the process cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
  • the colored composition of the present invention includes a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent, and the coloring agent includes a compound Y in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.
  • a film with excellent moisture resistance can be formed.
  • Compound Y has a substituent at the R 1 position in formula (1). It is presumed that the introduction of this substituent produces effects such as suppressing the hydrolysis of Compound Y, thereby improving the moisture resistance.
  • R 1 is a group having a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom
  • hydrolysis is thought to be further suppressed because these groups have high planarity.
  • the effects such as suppressing hydrolysis as described above are obtained, it is thought that the dispersion stability in the state of a dispersion liquid is also improved.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is preferably used as a colored composition for forming a color filter or an infrared transmission filter. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter or a coloring composition for forming an infrared transmission filter, and more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter.
  • Types of pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, yellow pixels, etc., and preferably red pixels, green pixels, or yellow pixels, and red pixels or green pixels. More preferably, it is a green pixel, and even more preferably it is a green pixel.
  • the wavelength at which the light transmittance of the film becomes 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm, and preferably 475 to 520 nm. It is more preferable that it exists in the wavelength range of 520 nm, and even more preferably that it exists in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Among these, it is preferable that the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% exists in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm.
  • the short wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm.
  • the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm.
  • a colored composition capable of forming a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a colored composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent.
  • a coloring agent one containing a compound Y in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom is used.
  • Compound Y is an azomethine metal complex.
  • R 1 represents a substituent
  • X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure.
  • X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be bonded to form a ring structure.
  • R 1 is preferably a substituent containing an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • a group represented by the following formula (O-1) is preferable.
  • R O1 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent
  • * represents a bonding site with the carbon atom to which R 1 in formula (1) is bonded.
  • R O1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may be either an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, even more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and a phenyl group is more preferable. Particularly preferred.
  • the above-mentioned aromatic heterocyclic group includes, but is not particularly limited to, an aromatic heterocyclic group containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom as a hetero atom.
  • the aromatic heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group may further form a polycyclic ring by condensation or the like with another aromatic hydrocarbon ring structure or aromatic heterocyclic structure.
  • the above alkyl group or aryl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.
  • R 1 is a group represented by formula (O-1)
  • the imide structure in the compound represented by formula (1) may be rearranged to become an amide structure.
  • R O1 is a hydrogen atom
  • an amide bond may be formed by the following transfer.
  • R N1 and R N2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and * represents the bonding site with the carbon atom to which R 1 in formula (1) is bonded. .
  • An embodiment in which one of R N1 and R N2 in formula (N-1) is a monovalent substituent and the other is a hydrogen atom is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • the monovalent substituent in R N1 and R N2 is preferably a hydrocarbon group, more preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • Preferred embodiments of the alkyl group and aryl group are the same as the preferred embodiments of the alkyl group and aryl group in R O1 in the above-mentioned formula (O-1). Moreover, the above alkyl group or aryl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.
  • the above X 2 is CR 2 and the above R 1 and the above R 2 are bonded to form a ring structure, or the above R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or a carbon Preferably, it is an alkyl group of number 2 or more.
  • the ring structure formed may be an aliphatic ring structure or an aromatic ring structure. Although it may exist, an aliphatic ring structure is preferable. Moreover, it may be a hydrocarbon ring structure or a heterocyclic structure. Examples of the heteroatom in the above heterocyclic structure include an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, and the like. Further, the ring structure is preferably a 5-membered ring structure or a 6-membered ring structure, and more preferably a 5-membered ring structure. Moreover, the above-mentioned ring structure may further form a double ring by condensation with another ring structure.
  • ring structure formed by combining the above R 1 and the above R 2 examples are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • a ring structure containing X 3 to X 5 as ring members and a hydroxy group respectively represent a ring structure containing X 3 to X 5 as ring members and a hydroxy group in formula (1)
  • Preferred embodiments of X 3 to X 5 in the following structure are the same as those of X 3 to X 5 in formula (1).
  • Preferred embodiments of the aryl group when R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms are the same as the preferred embodiments of the aryl group in R O1 in the above formula (O-1). be.
  • the above-mentioned aryl group is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, a phenyl group, a furanyl group, and the like.
  • Preferred embodiments of the aryl group in the aralkyl group when R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms are the preferred embodiments of the aryl group in R O1 in the above formula (O-1), Each is similar.
  • the alkyl group in the above aralkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the aralkyl group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a benzyl group and a phenylethyl group.
  • the alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the above-mentioned alkyl group is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, and the like.
  • R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms, these groups may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.
  • X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the above-mentioned substituent represented by R 2 include substituent T described below.
  • X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x .
  • X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x .
  • R x represents a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.
  • R SO 2 R 107 , -SO 2 NR 108 R 109 , -SO 2 OR 110 , -CONR 111 R 112 or NR 113 COR 114 are preferable, and a nitro group, a cyano group, -NR 101 R 102 , -OR 103 , -SR 104 , -COOR 105 or CONR 111 R 112 are more preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2.
  • halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, and the like, with a chlorine atom or a bromine atom being preferred.
  • R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, R 101 and R 102 may be combined to form a ring, and R 103 to R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group; , represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent.
  • R 101 and R 102 may be combined to form a ring.
  • R 101 and R 102 include a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, a piperazine ring, and a morpholine ring.
  • R 101 and R 102 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
  • R 103 to R 114 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, more preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • the ring formed may be a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocycle.
  • the hydrocarbon ring may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the heteroatom contained in the heterocycle include a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, and an oxygen atom.
  • the heterocycle is a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • rings formed include hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pyrene ring, perylene ring, dioxane ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyridine ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, Oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazoline ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzotriazole ring, purine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, Examples include heterocycles such as a quinazoline ring, a quinoxaline ring, a cinnoline ring, a pteridine ring, a pyrrolidine ring,
  • the metal atom to which the compound represented by formula (1) coordinates preferably contains Cu, Zn, Ni, Pd, Ti, Mn, Co, Al, or Fe, and the metal atom coordinates with the metal atom. It is more preferable to contain Cu, Zn, Ni, or Pd from the viewpoint of strengthening the bond with the child and making the metal part difficult to hydrolyze.
  • one compound represented by formula (1) may be coordinated to the metal atom, or two or more compounds may be coordinated to the metal atom. Moreover, a ligand other than the compound represented by formula (1) may be further coordinated to the metal atom.
  • Ligands include heterocyclic compounds (for example, pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (for example, water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds ( For example, triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''-pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (for example, N,N- dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, etc.), dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, and nitrile
  • compound Y may be a dinuclear complex.
  • the compound Y include a compound represented by the following formula (1-1), a compound represented by the formula (1-2), a compound represented by the formula (1-3), and a compound represented by the formula (1-4).
  • Examples include compounds represented by:
  • M 1 to M 5 each independently represent a metal atom.
  • Compound Y may be a compound having an acid group or a basic group.
  • the compound represented by formula (1) may have a structure having an acid group or a basic group.
  • the acid group or basic group is introduced into R 2 or R x in formula (1), for example.
  • Compound Y, in which the compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom, may be used, for example, as a dispersion aid.
  • a dispersion aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of pigments in a coloring composition.
  • Preferred embodiments of the acid group and basic group in the compound represented by formula (1) are the same as those of the acid group and basic group of the pigment derivative described later.
  • a ligand other than the compound represented by formula (1) and having an acid group or a basic group may further coordinate.
  • Such compound Y may also be used as the above-mentioned dispersion aid.
  • Preferred embodiments of the acid group and basic group in such a ligand are also the same as the preferred embodiments of the acid group and basic group of the pigment derivative described later.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention further contains a pigment.
  • the above-mentioned pigment may be a pigment that corresponds to compound Y, or may be a pigment that corresponds to "coloring agent other than compound Y", which will be described later.
  • substituent T examples include the following groups.
  • Halogen atom e.g. fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom
  • alkyl group preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkenyl group preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkynyl group preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an aryl group preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • a heterocyclic group preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an amino group preferably an amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an alkoxy group preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an aryloxy group preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • a heterocyclic oxy group preferably a carbon acyl group (preferably an acyl group having 2
  • Compound Y may be a pigment or a dye.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of compound Y is preferably in the wavelength range of 350 to 700 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 350 to 600 nm, and even more preferably in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm.
  • the average primary particle diameter of compound Y is preferably 1 to 200 nm.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less.
  • the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from a photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment using a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is determined, and the corresponding circular equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the average primary particle diameter in the present invention is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle diameters of 400 pigment primary particles.
  • the primary particles of pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the pigment can be adjusted, for example, by kneading and polishing, as described in the Examples below.
  • the kneading and polishing treatment is not particularly limited, and can be performed by a known method. Further, the average primary particle size of the pigment may be adjusted by other known methods during synthesis or use.
  • the crystallite size determined from the half-width of the peak derived from any crystal plane in the X-ray diffraction spectrum when CuK ⁇ rays are used as the X-ray source must be 0.1 to 100 nm. is preferable, and more preferably 0.5 to 50 nm.
  • Compound Y can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in Examples below. However, the synthesis method of compound Y is not particularly limited, and compound Y may be obtained by any synthesis method as long as it is a compound in which the compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom. Good too.
  • synthesizing compound Y raw materials that have been purified using activated carbon, silica gel, or the like may be used. Adsorbents used for purification include activated carbon, silica gel, zeolite, synthetic adsorbents, and Florisil. These materials are preferably in the form of powder or pellets.
  • Suitable purification treatments include a method in which the raw material is dissolved in an organic solvent or water and the dissolved solution is passed through a filter-like adsorbent, or a method in which the adsorbent is introduced into the dissolved solution and stirred.
  • the amount of adsorbent used in the purification treatment is preferably 0.01 to 10 parts by mass per 1 part by mass of the raw material.
  • the organic solvent for dissolving the raw materials methanol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, cyclopentanone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, etc. are preferably used. After the adsorbent is filtered off, the organic solvent is distilled off, and a purified raw material can be obtained by crystallization by adding a poor solvent.
  • compound Y examples include compounds (Y-1) to (Y-46) described in Examples below.
  • the content of compound Y in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 80% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of compound Y in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 4% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content is preferably 75% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition further contains a coloring agent other than Compound Y, which will be described later, the content of Compound Y may preferably be 1 to 30% by mass.
  • the lower limit of the content is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 4% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the content of compound Y is 1 to 1. In some cases, the content is preferably 30% by mass.
  • the lower limit of the content is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 4% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less. Only one type of compound Y may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a coloring agent other than the above compound Y.
  • other coloring agents used in combination include chromatic coloring agents such as green coloring agents, red coloring agents, yellow coloring agents, purple coloring agents, blue coloring agents, and orange coloring agents, and black coloring agents.
  • the other colorant is preferably at least one selected from green colorants, red colorants, and orange colorants, and more preferably at least one selected from green colorants and red colorants. , more preferably a green colorant.
  • the other coloring agent may be a pigment or a dye, but is preferably a pigment.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less. When the average primary particle diameter of the pigment is within the above range, the dispersion stability of the pigment in the colored resin composition is good.
  • red colorants examples include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and thioindigo compounds, which form a film with better light resistance. Because they are easy to use, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, and azo compounds are preferred, and diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds are more preferred. Moreover, it is preferable that the red colorant is a pigment.
  • red colorants include C.I. I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48:1, 48:2, 48:3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81:3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, Examples include red pigments such as 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, 297, and the like
  • C. I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 254, 255, 264, 269, 272 are preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 264, and 272 are more preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 and 264 are more preferred.
  • the green coloring agent examples include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, and phthalocyanine compounds are preferred because they facilitate the formation of a film with better light resistance. Moreover, it is preferable that the green coloring agent is a pigment.
  • green colorants include C.I. I.
  • examples include green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, and 66.
  • halogenated zinc phthalocyanine has an average number of 10 to 14 halogen atoms, an average of 8 to 12 bromine atoms, and an average of 2 to 5 chlorine atoms in one molecule.
  • Pigments can also be used.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720.
  • C. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 62, and 63 are preferred. used.
  • orange colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. orange pigments.
  • yellow colorants examples include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds, and perylene compounds.
  • Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36:1, 37, 37:1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166
  • an azobarbituric acid nickel complex having the following structure can also be used.
  • purple colorants include C.I. I.
  • Examples include purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, and 61.
  • blue colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15:1, 15:2, 15:3, 15:4, 15:6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88, etc.
  • examples include pigments.
  • an aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue colorant.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2012-247591 and paragraph number 0047 of JP-A No. 2011-157478.
  • triarylmethane dye polymers described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0028160, xanthene compounds described in JP 2020-117638, and International Publication No. 2020/174991 are also used.
  • the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A No. 2020-160279 or a salt thereof, the compound represented by formula 1 described in Korean Published Patent No. 10-2020-0069442, Korean Published Patent No. 10 Compounds represented by formula 1 described in -2020-0069730, compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean published patent No. 10-2020-0069070, Korean published patent No. 10-2020-0069067 Compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No.
  • 10-2020-0069062 halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments described in Patent No. 6809649, JP-A-2020- Isoindoline compounds described in JP 180176, phenothiazine compounds described in JP 2021-187913, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine described in WO 2022/004261, halogens described in WO 2021/250883 Zinc phthalocyanine can be used.
  • the pigment or dye may be a rotaxane, and the dye backbone may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, in the rod-like structure, or in both structures.
  • a chromatic coloring agent a quinophthalone compound represented by formula 1 of Korean Patent Publication No.
  • black colorant examples include bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, with bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds being preferred.
  • bisbenzofuranone compounds include compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-534726, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-515233, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-515234, and for example, as "Irgaphor Black” manufactured by BASF. available.
  • perylene compounds include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0016 to 0020 of JP-A No. 2017-226821, C.I. I. Pigment Black 31, 32, etc.
  • Examples of the azomethine compound include compounds described in JP-A-01-170601 and JP-A-02-034664, and are available as "Chromofine Black A1103" manufactured by Dainichiseika Kaisha, Ltd., for example. Further, as a black coloring material, a black organic pigment described in Japanese Patent No. 6985715, Lumogen Black FK4280, Paliogen Black S0084 (manufactured by BASF) may be used.
  • the crystallite size in the plane direction corresponding to the maximum peak in the X-ray diffraction pattern among the eight ( ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1) crystal lattice planes is 140 ⁇ or less. It is also preferable to use Furthermore, it is also preferable to set the physical properties of the pyrrolopyrrole pigment as described in paragraphs 0028 to 0073 of JP-A-2020-097744.
  • the crystallite size determined from the half-value width of the peak derived from any crystal plane in the X-ray diffraction spectrum when the CuK ⁇ ray of the pigment is used as the X-ray source is preferably 0.1 to 100 nm, and preferably 0.1 to 100 nm. It is more preferably from 5 to 50 nm, even more preferably from 1 to 30 nm, and particularly preferably from 5 to 25 nm.
  • the specific surface area of the pigment is preferably 1 to 300 m 2 /g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 m 2 /g or more, more preferably 30 m 2 /g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 250 m 2 /g or less, more preferably 200 m 2 /g or less.
  • the value of the specific surface area is determined according to DIN 66131: determination of the specific surface area of solids by gas adsorption according to the BET (Brunauer, Emmett and Teller) method. (Measurement of specific surface area of solids).
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a green colorant, it is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter. Moreover, when the coloring composition of the present invention contains a red colorant, it is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter.
  • the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition may include two or more types of chromatic coloring agents, and black may be formed by a combination of two or more types of chromatic coloring agents.
  • a colored composition is preferably used as a colored composition for forming an infrared transmission filter.
  • combinations of chromatic colorants in the case where black color is formed by a combination of two or more chromatic colorants include the following. (1) Embodiment containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, and a yellow colorant. (2) An embodiment containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, a yellow colorant, and a purple colorant.
  • the content of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 55% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, and even more preferably 70% by mass or less.
  • the content of Compound Y in the colorant is preferably 1 to 25% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 4% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a colorant containing a yellow colorant and a green colorant.
  • compound Y is a yellow coloring agent. That is, it is preferable that the yellow colorant contains compound Y.
  • the mass ratio of the yellow colorant to the green colorant is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass of the yellow colorant to 100 parts by mass of the green colorant.
  • the upper limit is preferably 90 parts by mass or less, more preferably 80 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more.
  • the content of compound Y is preferably 1 to 60 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the green colorant.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention When using the coloring composition of the present invention as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a colorant containing a yellow colorant and a red colorant. Moreover, it is preferable that compound Y is a yellow coloring agent. That is, it is preferable that the yellow colorant contains compound Y.
  • the mass ratio of the yellow colorant to the red colorant is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass of the yellow colorant to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant.
  • the upper limit is preferably 90 parts by mass or less, more preferably 80 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more.
  • the content of compound Y is preferably 1 to 60 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the red colorant.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.
  • the content of the yellow colorant in the colorant is preferably 30% by mass or more, and preferably 40% by mass or more. is more preferable, and even more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • compound Y is a yellow coloring agent. That is, it is preferable that the yellow colorant contains compound Y.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for dispersing pigments in a coloring composition or for use as a binder.
  • a resin used mainly for dispersing pigments and the like in a coloring composition is also referred to as a dispersant.
  • this use of the resin is just an example, and the resin can also be used for purposes other than this use.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.
  • the resin examples include (meth)acrylic resin, epoxy resin, (meth)acrylamide resin, ene thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, and polyarylene.
  • examples include ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, and siloxane resin.
  • the resins include the resin described in the examples of International Publication No.
  • Polyisocyanate resin resin described in JP 2020-122052, resin described in JP 2020-111656, resin described in JP 2020-139021, JP 2017-138503 Resin containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain described in JP-A-2020-186373, resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP-A No. 2020-186325 Alkali-soluble resins described in the publication, resins represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0078339, copolymers containing epoxy groups and acid groups described in International Publication No. 2022/030445 You can also use
  • the resin it is preferable to use a resin having acid groups.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more, particularly preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, even more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 5,000 to 50,000. Further, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 1,000 to 20,000.
  • the resin having an acid group preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group in its side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol% of repeating units having an acid group in its side chain based on the total repeating units of the resin.
  • the upper limit of the content of repeating units having acid groups in their side chains is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of repeating units having acid groups in their side chains is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a resin having a basic group.
  • the resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain, and a resin having a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group.
  • a polymer is more preferable, and a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group is even more preferable.
  • a resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.
  • resins having basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (manufactured by BYK Chemie), Solsperse 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 385 00, 39000, 53095, 56000, 7100 (all manufactured by Japan Lubrizol), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (all manufactured by BASF), and the like.
  • the resin having a basic group is the block copolymer (B) described in paragraph numbers 0063 to 0112 of JP2014-219665A, and the block copolymer (B) described in paragraphs 0046 to 0076 of JP2018-156021A. It is also possible to use block copolymer A1, a vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs 0150 to 0153 of JP-A No. 2019-184763, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved.
  • the content of the resin having a basic group is preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group.
  • the amount is preferably 30 to 300 parts by weight, more preferably 50 to 200 parts by weight.
  • the resin is derived from a monomer component containing a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as "ether dimer”). It is also preferable to use a resin containing repeating units.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15.
  • the alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, even more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • Examples of the compound represented by formula (X) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate of paracumylphenol.
  • Commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the resin it is also preferable to use a resin having a crosslinkable group.
  • the crosslinkable group include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a styrene group, a (meth)allyl group, and a (meth)acryloyl group.
  • Examples of the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, with an epoxy group being preferred.
  • the epoxy group may be a cycloaliphatic epoxy group. Note that the alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed.
  • the cyclic ether group is preferably at least one selected from a group represented by formula (e-1) and a group represented by formula (e-2); More preferably, it is a group in which When n in formula (e-1) is 0, the group represented by formula (e-1) is an epoxy group, and when n is 1, the group represented by formula (e-1) is The group is an oxetanyl group. Furthermore, the group represented by formula (e-2) is an alicyclic epoxy group.
  • R E1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond; in formula (e-2), ring A E1 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon It represents a ring, and * represents a bond.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R E1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group represented by R E1 is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • R E1 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R E1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • formula (e-1) is a group represented by the following formula (e-1a).
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by ring A E1 in formula (e-2) may be a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or a condensed aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by ring A E1 may have a crosslinked structure. Among these, a condensed aliphatic hydrocarbon ring is preferred because it facilitates the formation of a membrane with excellent moisture resistance, and a condensed aliphatic hydrocarbon ring having a crosslinked structure is preferred. Specific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ring A E1 include the groups shown below, including the group represented by formula (e-2-3) and the group represented by formula (e-2-4). Groups are preferred. In the following formula, * represents a bond.
  • the resin having a cyclic ether group it is preferable to use a resin containing a repeating unit having a cyclic ether group.
  • the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group include a repeating unit represented by formula (A1).
  • X a1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L a1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z a1 represents a cyclic ether group.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by X a1 in formula (A1) includes a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, and a polyamide linking group.
  • Examples include linking groups, polyether linking groups, polystyrene linking groups, bisphenol linking groups, novolac linking groups, and poly(meth)acrylic linking groups, polyether linking groups, polyester linking groups, bisphenol linking groups, etc.
  • a linking group and a novolak-based linking group are preferred, a polyether-based linking group, a novolak-based linking group, and a poly(meth)acrylic-based linking group are more preferred, and a poly(meth)acrylic-based linking group is even more preferred.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L a1 in formula (A1) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH- , -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 in formula (A1) include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferred.
  • the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 is preferably a group represented by formula (e-1) or a group represented by formula (e-2); More preferably, it is a group in which
  • the content of repeating units having a cyclic ether group in the resin having a cyclic ether group is preferably 1 to 100 mol% of all repeating units in the resin having a cyclic ether group.
  • the upper limit is preferably 90 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.
  • the resin having a cyclic ether group may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group.
  • Other repeating units include a repeating unit having an acid group (hereinafter also referred to as repeating unit B-1) and a repeating unit having a group whose acid group is protected with a protective group (hereinafter also referred to as repeating unit B-2). , a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group (hereinafter also referred to as repeating unit B-3), and the like.
  • Examples of the acid group possessed by the repeating unit B-1 and the acid group protected by the protecting group in the repeating unit B-2 include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group. , a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, and more preferably a carboxy group.
  • Examples of the protecting group that protects the acid group in the repeating unit B-2 include groups that are decomposed and eliminated by the action of an acid or a base.
  • the protecting group is preferably a group represented by any of formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and is preferably a group represented by formula (Y3) or formula (Y5) because it is easy to deprotect. is more preferable.
  • R Y1 to R Y3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of R Y1 to R Y3 may be bonded to form a ring;
  • R Y4 to R Y6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of R Y4 to R Y6 may be bonded to form a ring;
  • R Y7 and R Y8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R Y7 and R Y8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R Y9 is an alkyl group.
  • R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 may be bonded to form a ring
  • Ar Y1 represents an aryl group
  • R Y10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • R Y11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R Y1 to R Y3 in formula (Y1) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. In formula (Y1), two of R Y1 to R Y3 may be combined to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by combining two of R Y1 to R Y3 includes monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl group and cyclohexyl group, norbornyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, tetracyclododecanyl group, and adamantyl group.
  • monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as groups, and monocyclic cycloalkyl groups having 5 to 6 carbon atoms are preferred.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R Y4 to R Y6 in formula (Y2) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. At least two of R Y4 to R Y6 in formula (Y2) are preferably methyl groups. In formula (Y2), two of R Y4 to R Y6 may be bonded to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed include the ring described in formula (Y1).
  • R Y7 and R Y8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R Y7 and R Y8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R Y9 is an alkyl group. represents a group or an aryl group, and R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 may be combined to form a ring.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12.
  • Examples of the ring formed by bonding R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 include a tetrahydrofuranyl group, a tetrahydropyranyl group, and the like.
  • R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 are preferably bonded to form a ring.
  • Ar Y1 represents an aryl group
  • R Y10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • Ar Y1 and R Y10 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12.
  • R Y10 is preferably an alkyl group.
  • R Y11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the molecular weight of the protecting group is preferably 40 to 200, more preferably 40 to 150, even more preferably 40 to 120.
  • a colored composition can be obtained which has excellent storage stability and excellent curability at low temperatures.
  • protecting groups include 1-methoxyethyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-n-propoxyethyl group, 1-n-butoxyethyl group, 1-t-butoxyethyl group, 1-cyclopentyloxyethyl group.
  • a 2-tetrahydropyranyl group is preferred, and a 1-ethoxyethyl group and a 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group are more preferred.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group possessed by the repeating unit B-3 include a vinyl group, a styrene group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and the like.
  • Examples of the repeating unit B-1 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B1). Furthermore, examples of the repeating unit B-2 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B2). Further, examples of the repeating unit B-3 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B3).
  • X b1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b1 represents an acid group.
  • X b2 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b2 represents a group whose acid group is protected with a protecting group.
  • X b3 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b3 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by X b1 in formula (B1), the trivalent linking group represented by X b2 in formula (B2), and the trivalent linking group represented by X b3 in formula (B3) are not particularly limited. do not have.
  • Examples include poly(meth)acrylic linking groups, novolac linking groups, poly(meth)acrylic linking groups, polyether linking groups, polyester linking groups, bisphenol linking groups, and novolak linking groups.
  • a system linking group is more preferred.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L b1 in formula (B1), the divalent linking group represented by L b2 in formula (B2), and the divalent linking group represented by L b3 in formula (B3) include an alkylene group ( (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO -, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these are exemplified.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • the acid group represented by Z b1 in formula (B1) includes a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group, preferably a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, and a carboxy group. is more preferable.
  • Examples of the group in which the acid group represented by Z b2 in formula (B2) is protected with a protecting group include groups in which the acid group is protected with a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5).
  • the acid group represented by formula (Y3) or formula (Y5) is preferably a group protected by a group represented by formula (Y3) or formula (Y5).
  • Examples of the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group, preferably a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, and more preferably a carboxy group.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group represented by Z b3 in formula (B3) include a vinyl group, a styrene group, a (meth)allyl group, and a (meth)acryloyl group.
  • the content of the unit B-1 in the resin having a cyclic ether group is 5 to 85 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable that there be.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 40 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.
  • the content of the unit B-2 in the resin having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable that there be.
  • the upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.
  • the resin having a cyclic ether group contains each of repeating unit B-1 and repeating unit B-2
  • the resin having a cyclic ether group contains 0 repeating unit B-2 per mole of repeating unit B-1.
  • the content is preferably 0.4 to 3.2 moles, more preferably 0.8 to 2.8 moles, and even more preferably 1.2 to 2.4 moles.
  • the content of the unit B-3 in the resin having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable that there be.
  • the upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.
  • the resin having a cyclic ether group further contains a repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and preferably a benzene ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is 1 to 65% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. Preferably it is mol%.
  • the upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.
  • the repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring include repeating units derived from monofunctional polymerizable compounds having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring such as vinyltoluene and benzyl (meth)acrylate.
  • Examples of commercially available resins having a cyclic ether group include EPICLON HP5000 and EPICLON HP4032D (manufactured by DIC Corporation) as naphthalene-modified epoxy resins.
  • Examples of the alkyl diphenol type epoxy resin include EPICLON 820 (manufactured by DIC Corporation).
  • jER825, jER827, jER828, jER834, jER1001, jER1002, jER1003, jER1055, jER1007, jER1009, jER1010 (the above, Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050, EPICLON1051, EPICLON1055 (manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.), etc.
  • Bisphenol F type epoxy resins include jER806, jER807, jER4004, jER4005, jER4007, jER4010 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON830, EPICLON835 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE -602S( The above examples include those manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of phenol novolac type epoxy resins include jER152, jER154, jER157S70, jER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, and EPICLON N-775 (manufactured by DIC Corporation). ) etc. Can be mentioned.
  • EPICLON N-660 As cresol novolak type epoxy resin, EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (The above are manufactured by DIC Corporation) , EOCN-1020 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.
  • Celoxide 2021P Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, EPOLEAD Examples
  • PB 4700 manufactured by Daicel Corporation
  • Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, and EX-850L manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation.
  • resins having a cyclic ether group include resins described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0036 of JP-A No.
  • the resin it is also preferable to use a resin having an aromatic carboxy group (hereinafter also referred to as resin Ac).
  • the aromatic carboxy group may be included in the main chain of the repeating unit, or may be included in the side chain of the repeating unit.
  • the aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • an aromatic carboxy group refers to a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring.
  • the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 to 2.
  • the resin Ac is preferably a resin containing at least one type of repeating unit selected from a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-1) and a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-2).
  • Ar 1 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxy group
  • L 1 represents -COO- or CONH-
  • L 2 represents a divalent linking group
  • Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxy group
  • L 11 represents -COO- or CONH-
  • L 12 represents a trivalent linking group
  • P 10 represents a polymer chain. represents.
  • Examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1) include a structure derived from an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride, a structure derived from an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride, and the like.
  • Examples of the aromatic tricarboxylic anhydride and aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydride include compounds having the following structures.
  • Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, represented by the following formula (Q-1). or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
  • the aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 1 may have a crosslinkable group.
  • the crosslinkable group is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group, and more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13). Examples include groups such as
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2.
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.
  • n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, and preferably 1. More preferred. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, the above formula (Q- Represents a group represented by 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L 1 .
  • L 1 represents -COO- or CONH-, preferably -COO-.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (Ac-1) includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and these. Examples include groups combining two or more of the following.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the alkylene group and arylene group may have a substituent.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 is preferably a group represented by -L 2a -O-.
  • L 2a is an alkylene group; an arylene group; a group combining an alkylene group and an arylene group; at least one selected from an alkylene group and an arylene group, and -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, Examples include a group combining at least one selected from -NH- and S-, and an alkylene group is preferred.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkylene group and arylene group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group.
  • the aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) has the same meaning as Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L 11 represents -COO- or CONH-, preferably -COO-.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 includes a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and these two groups. Examples include groups that combine more than one species.
  • the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20, and even more preferably 1 to 15.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).
  • L 12b represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents formula ( It represents the bonding position of Ac-2) with P10 .
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12b includes a hydrocarbon group; a hydrocarbon group, and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and S-; Examples include a group in which a hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group and an -O- are combined.
  • L 12c represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents the bonding position of formula (Ac-2). It represents the bonding position of Ac-2) with P10 .
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12c is a hydrocarbon group; a hydrocarbon group, and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and S-; A hydrocarbon group is preferable.
  • P 10 represents a polymer chain.
  • the polymer chain represented by P 10 preferably has at least one type of repeating unit selected from poly(meth)acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units, and polyol repeating units.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P 10 is preferably 500 to 20,000.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of P 10 is within the above range, the pigment will have good dispersibility in the composition.
  • the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group is a resin having a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-2), this resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
  • the polymer chain represented by P 10 may contain a crosslinkable group.
  • the crosslinkable group include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant.
  • the dispersant include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins).
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) refers to a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol % or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %.
  • the acid group that the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) has is preferably a carboxy group.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH/g.
  • the basic dispersant refers to a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups.
  • the basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • the basic group that the basic dispersant has is preferably an amino group.
  • the resin used as a dispersant is a graft resin.
  • the descriptions in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A No. 2012-255128 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the resin used as a dispersant is a polyimine-based dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain.
  • the polyimine dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less, a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain.
  • the resin has The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it exhibits basicity.
  • the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the resin used as the dispersant has a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion.
  • resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers).
  • specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraph numbers 0196 to 0209 of JP-A No. 2013-043962.
  • the resin used as a dispersant is a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and more preferably 20 to 70 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin. More preferably, it is mol%.
  • resins described in JP 2018-087939, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraph numbers 0219 to 0221 of Patent No. 6432077, and international publication Polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in No. 2016/104803, block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP 2020-066687, A block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A No. 2020-066688, a dispersant described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, etc. can also be used.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples include the Disperbyk series manufactured by Byk Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 161, 2001, etc.), Solsperse manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. series (for example, Solsperse 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajisperse series manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno, Inc., and the like. Further, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP 2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP 2017-194662A can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the content of resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 50% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types of resin. When two or more types of resin are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound. Moreover, it is preferable that the coloring composition of this invention contains the polymerization initiator and polymeric compound mentioned later.
  • the polymerizable compound include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and the like.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, prepolymer, or oligomer, but monomers are preferred.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2000 or less, more preferably 1500 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 150 or more, more preferably 250 or more.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value (hereinafter referred to as C ⁇ C value) of the polymerizable compound is preferably 2 to 14 mmol/g from the viewpoint of stability of the coloring composition over time.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 mmol/g or more, more preferably 4 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 5 mmol/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 12 mmol/g or less, more preferably 10 mmol/g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol/g or less.
  • the C ⁇ C value of a polymerizable compound is a value calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable compound by the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing three or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and more preferably a compound containing four or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups.
  • the upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and even more preferably 6 or less from the viewpoint of the stability of the coloring composition over time.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a trifunctional or higher functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a trifunctional to 15 functional (meth)acrylate compound, and a trifunctional to 10 functional (meth)acrylate compound. More preferably, it is a tri- to hexa-functional (meth)acrylate compound.
  • polymerizable compounds examples include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, and modified products of these compounds.
  • modified product examples include compounds having a structure in which the (meth)acryloyl groups of the above compounds are bonded via an alkyleneoxy group, such as ethoxylated dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate.
  • Specific examples include compounds represented by formula (Z-4) and compounds represented by formula (Z-5).
  • E is each independently -((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O)-, or -((CH 2 ) y CH(CH 3 )O)- , each y independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and each X independently represents a (meth)acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxy group.
  • the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 3 or 4
  • each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40.
  • the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 5 or 6
  • each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4. Further, the sum of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4. Further, the sum of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
  • polypentaerythritol poly(meth)acrylate as shown in the following formula (Z-6) can also be used.
  • X 1 to X 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a (meth)acryloyl group, and n represents an integer of 1 to 10. However, at least one of X 1 to X 6 is a (meth)acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is at least one selected from the group consisting of dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate, polypentaerythritol poly(meth)acrylate, and modified products thereof. Preferably it is a seed.
  • Commercially available products include KAYARAD D-310, DPHA, DPEA-12 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), NK Ester A-DPH-12E, and TPOA-50 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Can be mentioned.
  • diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth)acrylate commercially available product is M-460; manufactured by Toagosei
  • pentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • NK ester A-TMMT 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate
  • RP-1040 Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Aronix TO-2349 Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • NK Oligo UA-7200 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Light Acrylate POB-A0 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate trimethylolpropanepropylene oxide modified tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide modified tri(meth)acrylate, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide modified tri(meth)acrylate
  • trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate.
  • Commercially available trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306, M-305.
  • M-303, M-452, M-450 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK ester A9300, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A -TMM-3LM-N, A-TMPT, TMPT (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD GPO-303, TMPTA, THE-330, TPA-330, PET-30 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Examples include.
  • a compound having an acid group such as a carboxy group, a sulfo group, or a phosphoric acid group can also be used.
  • Commercially available products of such compounds include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520, Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • a compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used as the polymerizable compound.
  • the description in paragraphs 0042 to 0045 of JP-A No. 2013-253224 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Examples of compounds having a caprolactone structure include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120, which are commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series.
  • a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used.
  • Commercially available products include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).
  • the polymerizable compound it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain environmentally controlled substances such as toluene.
  • environmentally controlled substances such as toluene.
  • Commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT, KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • urethane acrylates such as those described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-032293, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-016765 are used. Also suitable are urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418.
  • polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-01-105238.
  • the polymerizable compounds include UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, Commercially available products such as T-600, AI-600, LINC-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 35% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more kinds of polymerizable compounds. When two or more types of polymerizable compounds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof falls within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound, it is preferable that the colored composition of the present invention further contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet to visible range are preferred.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a radical photopolymerization initiator.
  • photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds with a triazine skeleton, compounds with an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, and the like.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds with a triazine skeleton, compounds with an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds e.g., acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, and the like.
  • photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyl dimethyl ketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, and hexaarylbylene compounds.
  • imidazole compounds onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketones
  • the compound is more preferably a compound selected from a compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and even more preferably an oxime compound.
  • photopolymerization initiators compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37 to 60p, vol. 19, No.
  • hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2',4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1'-biimidazole, etc. can be mentioned.
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, and Irgacure 117. 3, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (all BASF (manufactured by a company).
  • Commercially available ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, and Irgacure 36.
  • Irgacure 369E Irgacure 379EG (all manufactured by BASF) (manufactured by).
  • Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819, Irgacure TPO (manufactured by BASF), and the like.
  • Examples of oxime compounds include the compound described in paragraph 0142 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the compound described in Patent No. 5430746, the compound described in Patent No. 5647738, and the general formula (1 ) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024, and the compounds represented by the general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0117 to 0120 of JP-A-2021-170089.
  • oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino -1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime), and the like.
  • photopolymerization initiators include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring, oxime compounds having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring, oxime compounds having a fluorine atom, oxime compounds having a nitro group, and benzofuran skeleton.
  • Examples include oxime compounds having a carbazole skeleton with a substituent having a hydroxy group bonded to the carbazole skeleton, and compounds described in paragraphs 0143 to 0149 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.
  • the oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from a compound represented by formula (OX1) and a compound represented by formula (OX2), and more preferably a compound represented by formula (OX2). preferable.
  • R X3 to R X14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; However, at least one of R X10 to R X14 is an electron-withdrawing group.
  • electron-withdrawing groups include acyl groups, nitro groups, trifluoromethyl groups, alkylsulfinyl groups, arylsulfinyl groups, alkylsulfonyl groups, arylsulfonyl groups, and cyano groups, with acyl groups and nitro groups being preferred;
  • An acyl group is more preferable, and a benzoyl group is even more preferable because it facilitates the formation of a film with excellent properties.
  • R X12 is preferably an electron-withdrawing group
  • R X10 , R X11 , R X13 , and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • oxime compound OX examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4,600,600.
  • oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or 405 nm is preferably high, more preferably from 1000 to 300,000, even more preferably from 2000 to 300,000, and even more preferably from 5000 to 200,000. It is particularly preferable that there be.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using a known method. For example, it is preferable to measure with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent at a concentration of 0.01 g/L.
  • the photopolymerization initiator it is also preferable to use a combination of Irgacure OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and/or Irgacure OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) and Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).
  • a difunctional, trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • a radical photopolymerization initiator two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so that good sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the crystallinity decreases and the solubility in solvents improves, making it difficult to precipitate over time, thereby improving the stability of the colored resin composition over time.
  • Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiators include those listed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that their total amount falls within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention contains a solvent.
  • the solvent include organic solvents.
  • the type of solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition.
  • the organic solvent include ester solvents, ketone solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents.
  • paragraph number 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Ester solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and ketone solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -Heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol Acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N
  • aromatic hydrocarbons benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.
  • organic solvents for environmental reasons (for example, 50 mass ppm (parts) based on the total amount of organic solvents). per million), 10 mass ppm or less, and 1 mass ppm or less).
  • an organic solvent with a low metal content it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content. It is preferable that the metal content of the organic solvent is, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent at a mass ppt (parts per trillion) level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Kagaku Kogyo Nippo, November 13, 2015). .
  • Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore diameter of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
  • the organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one type of isomer may be included, or multiple types may be included.
  • the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is 0.8 mmol/L or less, and it is more preferable that the organic solvent contains substantially no peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.
  • the colored composition of the present invention does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances.
  • "not substantially containing environmentally controlled substances” means that the content of environmentally controlled substances in the coloring composition is 50 mass ppm or less, preferably 30 mass ppm or less. , more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less.
  • environmentally controlled substances include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene.
  • REACH Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals
  • PRTR Policy Release and It is registered as an environmentally regulated substance under the Transfer Register Act
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • the method is strictly regulated.
  • These compounds may be used as a solvent when producing each component used in the coloring composition, and may be mixed into the coloring composition as a residual solvent. From the viewpoint of human safety and environmental considerations, it is preferable to reduce the amount of these substances as much as possible.
  • methods for reducing environmentally controlled substances include a method of heating or reducing pressure in the system to raise the temperature above the boiling point of the environmentally controlled substance to distill off the environmentally controlled substances from the system.
  • distillation methods can be used at the stage of raw materials, at the stage of products obtained by reacting raw materials (for example, resin solution or polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or at the stage of colored compositions prepared by mixing these compounds. This is possible at any stage.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can further contain an infrared absorber.
  • an infrared absorber For example, when forming an infrared transmitting filter using the colored composition of the present invention, the wavelength of light transmitted through the film obtained by incorporating an infrared absorber into the colored composition is shifted to a longer wavelength side. can be done.
  • the infrared absorber is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength on the longer wavelength side than the wavelength of 700 nm.
  • the infrared absorber is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a range of more than 700 nm and less than 1800 nm.
  • the ratio A 1 /A 2 between the absorbance A 1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A 2 at the maximum absorption wavelength of the infrared absorbent is preferably 0.08 or less, and more preferably 0.04 or less.
  • Infrared absorbers include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, and azomethine. compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, metal borides, and the like. Specific examples of these include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0114 to 0121 of International Publication No. 2022/065215.
  • the compound described in paragraph number 0121 of International Publication No. 2022/065215, the squarylium compound described in JP 2020-075959, and Korean Published Patent No. 10-2019-0135217 Copper complexes described in publications can also be used.
  • the croconic acid compound described in JP-A No. 2021-195515 and the near-infrared absorbing dye described in JP-A No. 2022-022070 can also be used.
  • tungsten oxide represented by the following formula described in paragraph number 0025 of European Patent No. 3,628,645 can also be used.
  • M 1 and M 2 represent ammonium cations or metal cations, a is 0.01 to 0.5, b is 0 to 0.5, c is 1, and d is 2.5 to 3.
  • e is 0.01 to 0.75, n is 1, 2 or 3, m is 1, 2 or 3, and R is a hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. represent.
  • the content of the infrared absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of infrared absorber, or may contain two or more types of infrared absorbers. When two or more types of infrared absorbers are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative.
  • Pigment derivatives are used, for example, as dispersion aids.
  • a dispersion aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of pigments in a coloring composition.
  • the pigment derivative include compounds having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a pigment structure and a triazine structure, and an acid group or a basic group.
  • the above dye structures include quinoline dye structure, benzimidazolone dye structure, benzisoindole dye structure, benzothiazole dye structure, iminium dye structure, squarylium dye structure, croconium dye structure, oxonol dye structure, pyrrolopyrrole dye structure, diketo Pyrrolopyrrole dye structure, azo dye structure, azomethine dye structure, phthalocyanine dye structure, naphthalocyanine dye structure, anthraquinone dye structure, quinacridone dye structure, dioxazine dye structure, perinone dye structure, perylene dye structure, thiazine indigo dye structure, thioindigo dye structure, isoindoline dye structure, isoindolinone dye structure, quinophthalone dye structure, dithiol dye structure, triarylmethane dye structure, pyrromethene dye structure, etc.
  • Examples of the acid group that the pigment derivative has include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boronic acid group, an imide acid group, and salts thereof.
  • Atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K + , etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ , etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, Examples include phosphonium ions.
  • the imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 , -CONHSO 2 R X2 , -CONHCOR X3 or SO 2 NHCOR or SO 2 NHCOR X4 is more preferred, and -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 or CONHSO 2 R X2 is even more preferred.
  • R X1 to R X4 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group and aryl group represented by R X1 to R X4 may have a substituent.
  • the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
  • R X1 to R X4 are each independently preferably an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom, and more preferably an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, and even more preferably 6.
  • Examples of the basic group that the pigment derivative has include an amino group, a pyridinyl group and its salts, an ammonium group salt, and a phthalimidomethyl group.
  • Examples of atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.
  • Examples of the amino group include a group represented by -NR x11 R x12 and a cyclic amino group.
  • R x11 and R x12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and preferably an alkyl group. That is, the amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include substituent T.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include substituent T.
  • cyclic amino group examples include a pyrrolidine group, a piperidine group, a piperazine group, and a morpholine group. These groups may further have a substituent.
  • a pigment derivative having excellent visible transparency (hereinafter also referred to as a transparent pigment derivative) can be used.
  • the maximum molar extinction coefficient ( ⁇ max) of the transparent pigment derivative in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 3000 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less, and preferably 1000 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less. is more preferable, and even more preferably 100 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or less.
  • the lower limit of ⁇ max is, for example, 1 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or more, and may be 10 L ⁇ mol ⁇ 1 ⁇ cm ⁇ 1 or more.
  • pigment derivatives include compounds described in the Examples below, JP-A-56-118462, JP-A-63-264674, JP-A-01-217077, and JP-A-03-009961. , JP 03-026767, JP 03-153780, JP 03-045662, JP 04-285669, JP 06-145546, JP 06-212088, JP-A-06-240158, JP-A-10-030063, JP-A-10-195326, paragraph numbers 0086 to 0098 of International Publication No. 2011/024896, paragraph numbers 0063 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2012/102399 , paragraph number 0082 of International Publication No.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by weight, more preferably 2 to 15 parts by weight, and even more preferably 4 to 10 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the pigment. Further, the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 5 to 50 parts by weight, more preferably 10 to 40 parts by weight, and even more preferably 15 to 30 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of compound Y. Only one type of pigment derivative may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can also contain polyalkyleneimine.
  • Polyalkyleneimines are used, for example, as dispersion aids for pigments.
  • a dispersion aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of pigments in a coloring composition.
  • Polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of alkyleneimine.
  • Polyalkyleneimine is a polymer having a branched structure containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group, respectively.
  • the alkylene imine preferably has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, even more preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 carbon atoms.
  • the molecular weight of the polyalkylene imine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, even more preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2,000 or less.
  • the molecular weight of the polyalkylene imine if the molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula, the molecular weight of the polyalkylene imine is the value calculated from the structural formula.
  • the molecular weight of a specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or is difficult to calculate, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the boiling point elevation method is used.
  • the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the viscosity method is used. If the viscosity method cannot be used or it is difficult to measure, the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) is used.
  • the amine value of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol/g or more, more preferably 10 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol/g or more.
  • alkyleneimine examples include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, 2,3-butyleneimine, etc. Ethyleneimine or propyleneimine is preferable, and ethyleneimine is more preferable. preferable. It is particularly preferred that the polyalkyleneimine is polyethyleneimine. Further, the polyethyleneimine preferably contains 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more of primary amino groups based on the total of primary amino groups, secondary amino groups, and tertiary amino groups. , more preferably 30 mol% or more.
  • Commercial products of polyethyleneimine include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, and P-1000 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 4.5% by mass or less, more preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less.
  • the content of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the pigment.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, more preferably 1 part by mass or more, and even more preferably 2 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 8 parts by mass or less. Only one type of polyalkylene imine may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may also contain a curing accelerator.
  • the curing accelerator include thiol compounds, methylol compounds, amine compounds, phosphonium salt compounds, amidine salt compounds, amide compounds, base generators, isocyanate compounds, alkoxysilane compounds, onium salt compounds, and the like.
  • Specific examples of the curing accelerator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0094 to 0097 of International Publication No. 2018/056189, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0246 to 0253 of JP 2015-034963, and JP 2013-041165. Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0186 to 0251 of JP-A No.
  • the content of the curing accelerator in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • the ultraviolet absorber include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and the like. Specific examples of such compounds include the compound described in paragraph number 0179 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the reactive triazine ultraviolet absorber described in JP 2021-178918, and JP 2022-007884. It is also possible to use the ultraviolet absorbers described in .
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass.
  • only one type of ultraviolet absorber may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), Examples include 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol) and N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Among them, p-methoxyphenol is preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass.
  • the number of polymerization inhibitors may be one, or two or more. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent.
  • the silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups.
  • the term "hydrolyzable group" refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond through at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and an alkoxy group is preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group.
  • Examples of functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, mercapto groups, epoxy groups, oxetanyl groups, amino groups, ureido groups, sulfide groups, and isocyanate groups. , phenyl group, etc., and amino group, (meth)acryloyl group and epoxy group are preferable.
  • silane coupling agents include N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-602), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -amino Propyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-603), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-602), ⁇ -Aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-903), ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-
  • silane coupling agent examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018 to 0036 of JP-A No. 2009-288703 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0056 to 0066 of JP-A No. 2009-242604. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 0.01 to 15.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0% by mass. Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as fluorine surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicone surfactants can be used.
  • the surfactant is preferably a silicone surfactant or a fluorine surfactant.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorine surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid saving, and has good solubility in the coloring composition.
  • fluorine-based surfactant compounds described in paragraph numbers 0167 to 0169 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group, propyleneoxy group) (meth).
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A No. 2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-containing surfactant used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example 14,000. In the above compounds, % indicating the proportion of repeating units is mol%.
  • fluorine-based surfactant a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain can also be used. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295 of JP-A No. 2010-164965, Megafac RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation, Examples include RS-72-K. Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A No. 2015-117327 and fluorine-containing copolymers described in JP-A No. 2022-000494 can also be used.
  • a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by formula (fi-1) is also preferable to use as a surfactant.
  • m represents 1 or 2
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4
  • a represents 1 or 2
  • X a+ represents an a-valent metal ion, a primary ammonium ion, or Represents a secondary ammonium ion, a tertiary ammonium ion, a quaternary ammonium ion, or NH 4 + .
  • nonionic surfactants examples include compounds described in paragraph 0174 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.
  • silicone surfactants examples include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, SF 8419 OIL (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.), and TSF- 4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (manufactured by BYK Chemie), and the like.
  • a compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone surfactant.
  • the content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% to 3.0% by mass.
  • the number of surfactants may be one, or two or more. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant.
  • antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite compounds, thioether compounds, and the like.
  • the phenol compound any phenol compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used.
  • Preferred phenol compounds include hindered phenol compounds.
  • a compound having a substituent at a site adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position) is preferred.
  • the above-mentioned substituents are preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 22 carbon atoms.
  • a compound having a phenol group and a phosphorous acid ester group in the same molecule is also preferable.
  • phosphorus-based antioxidants can also be suitably used.
  • a phosphorus antioxidant tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepine-6 -yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl )oxy]ethyl]amine, ethylbis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite, and the like.
  • antioxidants include, for example, Adekastab AO-20, Adekastab AO-30, Adekastab AO-40, Adekastab AO-50, Adekastab AO-50F, Adekastab AO-60, Adekastab AO-60G, Adekastab AO-80. , ADEKA STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.).
  • antioxidants include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0023 to 0048 of Patent No. 6268967, compounds described in International Publication No. 2017/006600, compounds described in International Publication No. 2017/164024, Compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371 can also be used.
  • the content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain sensitizers, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers, and other auxiliary agents (e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, (leveling agents, peeling accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.) may also be included.
  • auxiliary agents e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, (leveling agents, peeling accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted. Examples of these components include the compounds described in paragraph 0182 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide in order to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film.
  • metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , and SiO 2 .
  • the primary particle diameter of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, and even more preferably 5 to 50 nm.
  • the metal oxide may have a core-shell structure. Further, in this case, the core portion may be hollow.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may also contain a lightfastness improver.
  • a lightfastness improver examples include compounds described in paragraph 0183 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is substantially free of terephthalate.
  • “substantially not containing” means that the content of terephthalic acid ester is 1000 mass ppb or less in the total amount of the coloring composition, more preferably 100 mass ppb or less, Particularly preferred is zero.
  • the colored resin composition of the present invention preferably has a free metal content of 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Further, the free halogen content is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Examples of methods for reducing free metals and halogens in the colored resin composition include methods such as washing with ion-exchanged water, filtration, ultrafiltration, and purification with emphasis on ion exchange.
  • perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acids and their salts may be regulated.
  • perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids particularly perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids whose perfluoroalkyl group has 6 to 8 carbon atoms
  • salts thereof and perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids
  • the content of fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid whose perfluoroalkyl group has 6 to 8 carbon atoms) and its salt is 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salt.
  • a coloring composition that is substantially free of and salts thereof.
  • Compounds that can be substituted for regulated compounds include, for example, compounds that are excluded from regulated targets due to differences in the number of carbon atoms in perfluoroalkyl groups.
  • the colored compositions of the present invention may include perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acids and salts thereof, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acids and salts thereof, to the maximum extent permissible.
  • the water content of the colored composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface condition (flatness, etc.), adjusting the film thickness, etc.
  • the value of viscosity can be appropriately selected as required, but for example, at 25° C., 0.3 mPa ⁇ s to 50 mPa ⁇ s is preferable, and 0.5 mPa ⁇ s to 20 mPa ⁇ s is more preferable.
  • the viscosity can be measured using, for example, a cone plate type viscometer with the temperature adjusted to 25°C.
  • the container for storing the coloring composition is not particularly limited, and any known container can be used. Further, as the storage container, the container described in paragraph 0187 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.
  • the colored composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components.
  • the colored composition may be prepared by dissolving and/or dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time, or, if necessary, each component may be prepared as two or more solutions or dispersions as appropriate.
  • a colored composition may be prepared by mixing these at the time of use (at the time of application).
  • a process of dispersing pigments when preparing the colored composition.
  • mechanical forces used for dispersing pigments include compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation, and the like.
  • Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion, and the like.
  • JP 2015-157893 A "Practical Application Comprehensive Data Collection, Published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be suitably used.
  • the particles may be made finer in a salt milling step.
  • the descriptions in JP-A No. 2015-194521 and JP-A No. 2012-046629 can be referred to, for example.
  • the colored composition In preparing the colored composition, it is preferable to filter the colored composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects.
  • a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects.
  • Examples of the type of filter and filtration method used for filtration include the filters and filtration methods described in paragraph numbers 0196 to 0199 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.
  • the film of the present invention is a film obtained from the colored composition of the present invention described above.
  • the film of the present invention can be used for optical filters such as color filters and infrared transmission filters.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be adjusted as appropriate depending on the purpose.
  • the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the film of the present invention When the film of the present invention is used as a color filter, the film of the present invention preferably has a green, red, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow hue, more preferably a green, red, or yellow hue. preferable. Further, the film of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, yellow pixels, etc., and preferably red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels, and red pixels or green pixels. More preferably, it is a green pixel, and even more preferably a green pixel.
  • the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, and more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. More preferably, it exists within the wavelength range. Among these, it is preferable that the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% exists in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the short wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm.
  • the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a green pixel.
  • the film of the present invention preferably has, for example, any one of the following spectral properties (1) to (4).
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is
  • the minimum value of the ratio in the wavelength range of 800 to 1300 nm is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm and transmit light with wavelengths exceeding 700 nm.
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is A film having a minimum value of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 900 to 1300 nm.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm and transmit light with a wavelength exceeding 850 nm.
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is A film having a minimum value of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1000 to 1300 nm.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm and transmit light with a wavelength exceeding 940 nm.
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is A film having a minimum value of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1300 nm.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in a wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm and transmit light with a wavelength exceeding 1040 nm.
  • the film of the present invention can be manufactured through a step of applying the colored composition of the present invention.
  • the film manufacturing method preferably further includes a step of forming a pattern (pixel). Examples of methods for forming patterns (pixels) include photolithography and dry etching, with photolithography being preferred.
  • Pattern formation by the photolithography method includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of exposing the colored composition layer to light in a pattern, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer to light. It is preferable to include a step of developing and removing the exposed portion to form a pattern (pixel). If necessary, a step of baking the colored composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixel) (post-bake step) may be provided.
  • a colored composition layer is formed on a support using the colored composition of the present invention.
  • the support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application.
  • a glass substrate, a silicon substrate, etc. may be mentioned, and a silicon substrate is preferable.
  • a charge coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, etc. may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • a black matrix that isolates each pixel may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • the silicon substrate may be provided with a base layer for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing substance diffusion, or flattening the substrate surface.
  • the base layer may be formed using a composition obtained by removing the coloring agent from the colored composition described herein, or a composition containing the resin described herein, a polymerizable compound, a surfactant, etc. good.
  • the surface contact angle of the underlayer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferable that the angle is 30 to 80° when measured with water.
  • a known method can be used to apply the coloring composition.
  • the coating method described in paragraph number 0207 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.
  • the colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). If the film is manufactured by a low-temperature process, prebaking may not be performed.
  • the prebaking temperature is preferably 150°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower, and even more preferably 110°C or lower.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 50°C or higher, or 80°C or higher.
  • the prebake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Prebaking can be performed on a hot plate, oven, or the like.
  • the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step).
  • the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing it to light through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. This allows the exposed portion to be cured.
  • Radiation (light) that can be used during exposure includes g-line, i-line, etc. Furthermore, light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm), ArF rays (wavelength 193 nm), and KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm). Furthermore, a long-wave light source of 300 nm or more can also be used. As a light source, an electrodeless ultraviolet lamp system, a hybrid ultraviolet and infrared curing can be used.
  • pulse exposure is an exposure method in which exposure is performed by repeating light irradiation and pauses in short cycles (for example, on the millisecond level or less).
  • the irradiation amount is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2 .
  • the oxygen concentration during exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to being carried out in the atmosphere, for example, exposure may be carried out in a low-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, or substantially The exposure may be carried out in an oxygen-free atmosphere (without oxygen), or in a high oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of more than 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume).
  • the exposure illuminance can be set appropriately, and is usually selected from the range of 1000W/m 2 to 100000W/m 2 (for example, 5000W/m 2 , 15000W/m 2 , or 35000W/m 2 ). Can be done.
  • the oxygen concentration and the exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined.
  • the illuminance may be 10,000 W/m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 10% by volume, and 20,000 W/m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 35% by volume.
  • the unexposed portions of the colored composition layer are developed and removed to form a pattern (pixel).
  • the unexposed areas of the colored composition layer can be removed by development using a developer.
  • the unexposed portions of the colored composition layer in the exposure step are eluted into the developer, leaving only the photocured portions.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30°C.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to improve the ability to remove residues, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
  • Examples of the developer include organic solvents, alkaline developers, and alkaline developers are preferably used.
  • the developer and cleaning method after development the developer and cleaning method described in paragraph number 0214 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.
  • Additional exposure processing and post-bake are post-development curing processing to complete curing.
  • the heating temperature in post-baking is, for example, preferably 100 to 240°C, more preferably 200 to 240°C.
  • Post-baking can be carried out in a continuous or batch manner using a heating means such as a hot plate, convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), or high-frequency heater to maintain the developed film under the above conditions.
  • the light used for exposure is preferably light with a wavelength of 400 nm or less. Further, the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.
  • Pattern formation by the dry etching method includes the steps of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and curing the entire colored composition layer to form a cured product layer; A step of forming a photoresist layer on this cured material layer, a step of exposing the photoresist layer in a pattern and then developing it to form a resist pattern, and etching the cured material layer using this resist pattern as a mask. It is preferable to include a step of dry etching using gas. In forming the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a prebaking process.
  • optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above.
  • Types of optical filters include color filters and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred.
  • As a color filter it is preferable to have the film of the present invention as a colored pixel of the color filter.
  • the optical filter may be provided with a protective layer on the surface of the film of the present invention.
  • a protective layer By providing a protective layer, various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, hydrophilic and hydrophobic properties, and shielding of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.) can be imparted.
  • the thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m. Examples of methods for forming the protective layer include a method of coating a resin composition dissolved in an organic solvent, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of pasting a molded resin with an adhesive.
  • Components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resin, ene thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, and polyimide.
  • Resin polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, polyol resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, aramid resin, polyamide resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, modified silicone resin, fluorine Examples include resin, polycarbonate resin, polyacrylonitrile resin, cellulose resin, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , Si 2 N 4 and the like, and two or more of these components may be contained.
  • the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 and Si 2 N 4 .
  • the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
  • a protective layer by applying a resin composition known methods such as a spin coating method, a casting method, a screen printing method, an inkjet method, etc. can be used as a method for applying the resin composition.
  • organic solvent contained in the resin composition known organic solvents (eg, propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.) can be used.
  • chemical vapor deposition methods thermal chemical vapor deposition, plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition
  • photochemical vapor deposition can be used as the chemical vapor deposition method.
  • the protective layer may contain organic/inorganic fine particles, absorbers for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.), refractive index adjusters, antioxidants, adhesives, surfactants, and other additives, as necessary. It may contain.
  • organic/inorganic fine particles include polymer fine particles (e.g., silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride. , magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, and the like.
  • the absorber for light of a specific wavelength a known absorber can be used.
  • the content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by weight, more preferably 1 to 60% by weight, based on the total weight of the protective layer.
  • the protective layer the protective layers described in paragraph numbers 0073 to 0092 of JP-A No. 2017-151176 can also be used.
  • the optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned into a lattice shape by partition walls, for example.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above.
  • the structure of the solid-state image sensor is not particularly limited as long as it includes the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state image sensor, but examples include the following structure.
  • a solid-state image sensor CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.
  • a transfer electrode made of polysilicon or the like.
  • a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like is formed on the light shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light shielding film and the light receiving part of the photodiode. It has a configuration in which a color filter is provided on the device protective film.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned into, for example, a lattice shape by partition walls.
  • the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each colored pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include devices described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-227478, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-179577, and International Publication No.
  • an ultraviolet absorbing layer may be provided within the structure of the solid-state image sensor to improve light resistance.
  • An imaging device equipped with the solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used not only as a digital camera or an electronic device having an imaging function (such as a mobile phone), but also as a vehicle-mounted camera or a surveillance camera.
  • the image display device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above.
  • Examples of the image display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • Examples of image display devices and details of each image display device see, for example, “Electronic Display Devices (written by Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Chosenkai Co., Ltd., published in 1990)” and “Display Devices (written by Junaki Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho)”. Co., Ltd., issued in 1989).
  • liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Kogyo Chosenkai Co., Ltd., published in 1994)".
  • Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Kogyo Chosenkai Co., Ltd., published in 1994)
  • the present invention can be applied to various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology.”
  • the compound of the present invention is a compound in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to Cu, Zn, Pd, or Ni.
  • R 1 represents a substituent
  • X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure.
  • X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x
  • R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.
  • the compound of the present invention is the same as the compound Y contained in the coloring composition of the present invention, except that the metal atomic species is limited to Cu, Zn, Pd, or Ni, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • Compounds (Y-10) to Compounds (Y-15) and Compounds (Y-17) to Compounds (Y-29) are compounds in which the compound described in the compound S column of the table below is coordinated to the copper atom. be.
  • the maximum absorption wavelengths of Compound (Y-10) to Compound (Y-15) and Compound (Y-17) to Compound (Y-29) were in the wavelength range of 350 to 600 nm.
  • Synthesis Example 40-46 Synthesis of Compounds (Y-40) to Compounds (Y-46) Compound (a-1) and compound (b-1) in Synthesis Example 1 were converted to compound (a) in the table below, respectively.
  • Compound (Y- 40) - Compound (Y-46) was synthesized.
  • Compounds (Y-40) to (Y-46) are compounds in which a compound described in the compound S column of the table below is coordinated to a copper atom.
  • the maximum absorption wavelengths of Compound (Y-40) to Compound (Y-46) existed in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm.
  • the kneading and polishing treatment was performed under the following conditions.
  • Kneading and polishing treatment conditions 5.3 parts by mass of pigment, 74.7 parts by mass of grinding agent, and 14 parts by mass of binder were added to Laboplast Mill (manufactured by Toyo Seiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.), and the temperature of the kneaded material in the device was brought to 70°C. The mixture was kneaded for 2 hours while the temperature was controlled so that the mixture was mixed.
  • Pigment Red 177 (anthraquinone compound, red pigment) PR224:C.
  • Pigment Red 224 (perylene compound, red pigment) PR254:C.
  • Pigment Red 254 (diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, red pigment) PR264:C.
  • Pigment Red 264 (diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, red pigment) PR272:C.
  • Pigment Red 272 (diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, red pigment)
  • 6432077 D8 Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 11000 D9: DISPERBYK (registered trademark)-142 (manufactured by BYK Chemie) D10: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 6000 D11: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 7000
  • the numerical value appended to the main chain is the molar ratio
  • the numerical value appended to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • Dispersions G1 to G75, Y1, R1 to R6, g1 Dispersions G1 to G75, Y1, R1 to R6, g1 described above
  • M1 A mixture of compounds with the following structure (a mixture in which the molar ratio of the compound on the left (a hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and the compound on the right (a pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) is 7:3)
  • M2 Compound with the following structure
  • M3 Compound with the following structure
  • M4 Succinic acid modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (acid value 67mgKOH/g)
  • M5 Compound with the following structure. The numbers in parentheses represent the number of repetitions.
  • M6 Compound with the following structure
  • (surfactant) W1 Compound with the following structure (weight average molecular weight 14,000). In the formula below, % indicating the proportion of repeating units is mol%.
  • (Fluorine surfactant) W2 Compound with the following structure (weight average molecular weight 3000). n represents the number of repetitions.
  • UV1 to UV2 Compounds with the following structure
  • solvent S1 to S6 the above-mentioned solvents S1 to S6
  • the film was exposed to light having a wavelength of 365 nm at an exposure dose of 500 mJ/cm 2 to produce a film.
  • the glass substrate was placed on the horizontal rotary table of a spin shower developing machine (Model DW-30, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and developed using a CD-2000 (manufactured by Fujifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.). Paddle development was performed at 23° C. for 60 seconds, and the glass substrate was rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm using a rotating device. p. m.
  • Example 101 While rotating at revolutions per minute (revolutions per minute), pure water was supplied from above the center of rotation in the form of a shower from a jet nozzle to perform rinsing treatment, followed by post-baking at 200° C. for 3 minutes to produce a film.
  • Example 101 the above-mentioned exposure, development, and post-baking were omitted, and the film obtained after pre-baking was used as it was for the moisture resistance test.
  • the obtained film was subjected to a humidity resistance test in which it was left to stand for 96 hours in an atmosphere of a temperature of 110° C. and a relative humidity of 85% using a constant temperature and humidity chamber (manufactured by Yamada Kagaku Co., Ltd., IW222).
  • the transmittance in the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm was measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3600, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, reference: glass substrate). Transmittance (%) - Transmittance of membrane after moisture resistance test (%)) / Transmittance of membrane before moisture resistance test (%)] ⁇ 100
  • the moisture resistance was evaluated using the following criteria. The evaluation results are listed in the "Moisture resistance" column of the table. A: The transmittance variation was less than 2% in the entire wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm.
  • the transmittance variation was less than 5% in the entire wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm, and the transmittance variation in at least some wavelengths was 2% or more and less than 5%.
  • C The transmittance variation was less than 10% in the entire wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm, and the transmittance variation in at least some wavelengths was 5% or more and less than 10%.
  • D The transmittance variation was 10% or more in at least a part of the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm.
  • the colored compositions of Examples were able to form films with excellent moisture resistance. Films formed from the colored compositions of Examples can be suitably used for optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a coloring composition comprising a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent, wherein the coloring agent includes a compound Y in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom; a film obtained from the coloring composition; a color filter having the film; a solid-state imaging element and an image display device which have the color filter; and a compound. In formula (1), R1 represents a substituent; X2 represents CR2 or a nitrogen atom; R2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; R1 and R2 may bond to form a ring structure, X3 to X9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH, or CRx; Rx represents a substituent; and when the total number of R2 and Rx is not less than two, at least two of R2 and Rx may bond to form a ring structure.

Description

着色組成物、膜、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置及び化合物Colored compositions, films, color filters, solid-state imaging devices, image display devices, and compounds

 本発明は、着色剤を含む着色組成物に関する。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた膜、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置及び化合物に関する。 The present invention relates to a colored composition containing a coloring agent. The present invention also relates to a film, a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, an image display device, and a compound using the colored composition.

 近年、デジタルカメラ、カメラ付き携帯電話等の普及から、電荷結合素子(CCD)イメージセンサなどの固体撮像素子の需要が大きく伸びている。ディスプレイや光学素子のキーデバイスとしてカラーフィルタが使用されている。カラーフィルタは、通常、赤、緑及び青の3原色の画素を備えており、透過光を3原色へ分解する役割を果たしている。 In recent years, with the spread of digital cameras, camera-equipped mobile phones, etc., demand for solid-state imaging devices such as charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensors has increased significantly. Color filters are used as key devices for displays and optical elements. A color filter usually includes pixels of three primary colors, red, green, and blue, and serves to separate transmitted light into the three primary colors.

 カラーフィルタの各色の着色画素は、着色剤を含む着色組成物を用いて製造されている。着色剤を含む着色組成物はカラーフィルタ以外の様々な分野においても使用されており、例えば特許文献1には、特定の構造を有する金属錯体化合物を含有することを特徴とする電子写真用トナーが記載されている。 The colored pixels of each color of the color filter are manufactured using a colored composition containing a coloring agent. Coloring compositions containing colorants are used in various fields other than color filters. For example, Patent Document 1 describes an electrophotographic toner containing a metal complex compound having a specific structure. Are listed.

特開昭59-088744号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 59-088744

 近年では、着色剤を含む着色組成物を用いて形成される膜について、耐湿性の更なる向上が求められている。 In recent years, there has been a demand for further improvement in moisture resistance for films formed using coloring compositions containing colorants.

 本発明の目的は、耐湿性に優れた膜を形成できる着色組成物、上記着色組成物から得られる膜、上記膜を有するカラーフィルタ、上記カラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することである。
 また、本発明の別の目的は、新規な化合物を提供することである。
An object of the present invention is to provide a colored composition capable of forming a film with excellent moisture resistance, a film obtained from the colored composition, a color filter having the above film, a solid-state imaging device having the above color filter, and an image display device. That's true.
Another object of the present invention is to provide novel compounds.

 本発明者の検討によれば、後述する着色組成物により上記目的を達成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。よって、本発明は以下を提供する。 According to the studies of the present inventors, it was discovered that the above object can be achieved by the coloring composition described below, and the present invention was completed. Accordingly, the present invention provides the following.

<1> 着色剤と、
 樹脂と、
 溶剤とを含み、
 上記着色剤は、金属原子に式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Yを含む
 着色組成物。

 式(1)中、Rは置換基を表し、XはCR又は窒素原子を表し、Rは水素原子又は置換基を表し、R及びRは結合して環構造を形成してもよく、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、窒素原子、CH又はCRを表し、Rは置換基を表し、R及びRの合計数が2以上である場合、R及びRのうち少なくとも2つは結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
<2> 上記XがCRであって上記R及び上記Rが結合して環構造を形成しているか、又は、上記Rがアリール基、アラルキル基又は炭素数2以上のアルキル基である、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
<3> 上記Rが、酸素原子又は窒素原子を含む置換基である、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
<4> 上記金属原子は、Cu、Zn、Ni、Pd、Ti、Mn、Co、Al又はFeを含む、<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
<5> 緑色着色剤及び赤色着色剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種を更に含む、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
<6> 重合開始剤、及び、重合性化合物を更に含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
<7> カラーフィルタ形成用である、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
<8> <1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。
<9> <8>に記載の膜を有するカラーフィルタ。
<10><9>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する、固体撮像素子又は画像表示装置。
<11> Cu、Zn、Pd又はNiに、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している
 化合物。

 式(1)中、Rは置換基を表し、XはCR又は窒素原子を表し、Rは水素原子又は置換基を表し、R及びRは結合して環構造を形成してもよく、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、窒素原子、CH又はCRを表し、Rは置換基を表し、R及びRの合計数が2以上である場合、R及びRのうち少なくとも2つは結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
<1> Coloring agent,
resin and
containing a solvent,
The coloring composition includes a compound Y in which the compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.

In formula (1), R 1 represents a substituent, X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom, R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure. X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.
<2> The above X 2 is CR 2 and the above R 1 and the above R 2 are bonded to form a ring structure, or the above R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms. The colored composition according to <1>.
<3> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein R 1 is a substituent containing an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
<4> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the metal atom contains Cu, Zn, Ni, Pd, Ti, Mn, Co, Al, or Fe.
<5> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, further comprising at least one selected from a green colorant and a red colorant.
<6> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, further comprising a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.
<7> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, which is for forming a color filter.
<8> A film obtained from the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>.
<9> A color filter having the film according to <8>.
<10> A solid-state image sensor or image display device having the color filter according to <9>.
<11> A compound in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to Cu, Zn, Pd, or Ni.

In formula (1), R 1 represents a substituent, X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom, R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure. X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.

 本発明によれば、耐湿性に優れた膜を形成できる着色組成物、上記着色組成物から得られる膜、上記膜を有するカラーフィルタ、上記カラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することができる。
 また、本発明によれば、新規な化合物を提供することができる。
According to the present invention, there are provided a colored composition capable of forming a film with excellent moisture resistance, a film obtained from the colored composition, a color filter having the above film, a solid-state imaging device having the above color filter, and an image display device. be able to.
Further, according to the present invention, a novel compound can be provided.

 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線又は放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイル及びメタクリロイルの双方、又は、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量及び数平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書において、顔料とは、溶剤に対して溶解しにくい化合物を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
The content of the present invention will be explained in detail below.
In the present specification, "~" is used to include the numerical values described before and after it as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In the description of a group (atomic group) in this specification, the description that does not indicate substituted or unsubstituted includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group). For example, the term "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In this specification, "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. Examples of the light used for exposure include actinic rays or radiation such as the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
In the present specification, "(meth)acrylate" represents acrylate and/or methacrylate, "(meth)acrylic" represents both acrylic and/or methacrylic, and "(meth)acrylate" represents acrylic and/or methacrylate. ) "Acryloyl" refers to either or both of acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In this specification, Me in the structural formula represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
In this specification, a pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
In this specification, the term "process" is used not only to refer to an independent process, but also to include a process in which the intended effect of the process is achieved even if the process cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .

<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、着色剤と、樹脂と、溶剤とを含み、上記着色剤は、金属原子に式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Yを含む。
<Colored composition>
The colored composition of the present invention includes a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent, and the coloring agent includes a compound Y in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.

 本発明の着色組成物によれば、耐湿性に優れた膜を形成することができる。このような効果が得られる詳細な理由は不明であるが、以下のように推測される。
 化合物Yは、式(1)におけるRの位置に置換基を有する。
 この置換基の導入により、化合物Yの加水分解が抑制される等の効果が得られ、上記耐湿性が向上するものと推測される。
 特に、Rが窒素原子又は酸素原子を有する基である場合、これらの基は平面性が高いため、更に加水分解が抑制されると考えられる。
 また、上記のように加水分解が抑制される等の効果が得られるため、分散液の状態での分散安定性についても向上すると考えられる。
According to the colored composition of the present invention, a film with excellent moisture resistance can be formed. Although the detailed reason for obtaining such an effect is unknown, it is assumed as follows.
Compound Y has a substituent at the R 1 position in formula (1).
It is presumed that the introduction of this substituent produces effects such as suppressing the hydrolysis of Compound Y, thereby improving the moisture resistance.
In particular, when R 1 is a group having a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom, hydrolysis is thought to be further suppressed because these groups have high planarity.
Furthermore, since the effects such as suppressing hydrolysis as described above are obtained, it is thought that the dispersion stability in the state of a dispersion liquid is also improved.

 本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタ形成用又は赤外線透過フィルタ形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。より詳しくは、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物や、赤外線透過フィルタ形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いられる。画素の種類としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられ、赤色画素、緑色画素又は黄色画素であることが好ましく、赤色画素又は緑色画素であることがより好ましく、緑色画素であることが更に好ましい。 The colored composition of the present invention is preferably used as a colored composition for forming a color filter or an infrared transmission filter. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter or a coloring composition for forming an infrared transmission filter, and more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter. Types of pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, yellow pixels, etc., and preferably red pixels, green pixels, or yellow pixels, and red pixels or green pixels. More preferably, it is a green pixel, and even more preferably it is a green pixel.

 本発明の着色組成物を用いて厚さ0.65μmの膜を形成した際に、膜の光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。なかでも、光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲と、575~625nmの波長範囲のそれぞれに存在することが好ましい。この態様において、光透過率が50%となる短波長側の波長は、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。また、光透過率が50%となる長波長側の波長は、580~620nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、585~615nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。このような分光特性を有する膜を形成できる着色組成物は、カラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。 When a film with a thickness of 0.65 μm is formed using the colored composition of the present invention, the wavelength at which the light transmittance of the film becomes 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm, and preferably 475 to 520 nm. It is more preferable that it exists in the wavelength range of 520 nm, and even more preferably that it exists in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Among these, it is preferable that the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% exists in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the short wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Further, the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm. A colored composition capable of forming a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a colored composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.

 以下、本発明の着色組成物に用いられる各成分について説明する。 Hereinafter, each component used in the colored composition of the present invention will be explained.

<<着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は着色剤を含有する。着色剤としては、金属原子に、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Yを含むものが用いられる。化合物Yは、アゾメチン金属錯体である。

 式(1)中、Rは置換基を表し、XはCR又は窒素原子を表し、Rは水素原子又は置換基を表し、R及びRは結合して環構造を形成してもよく、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、窒素原子、CH又はCRを表し、Rは置換基を表し、R及びRの合計数が2以上である場合、R及びRのうち少なくとも2つは結合して環構造を形成していてもよい。
<<Colorant>>
The colored composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent. As the coloring agent, one containing a compound Y in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom is used. Compound Y is an azomethine metal complex.

In formula (1), R 1 represents a substituent, X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom, R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure. X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be bonded to form a ring structure.

 式(1)中、耐湿性の観点からは、Rは酸素原子又は窒素原子を含む置換基であることが好ましい。
 酸素原子を含む置換基としては、下記式(O-1)で表される基が好ましい。

 式(O-1)中、RO1は水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、*は式(1)中のRが結合する炭素原子との結合部位を表す。
 式(O-1)中、RO1は、水素原子又は炭化水素基であることが好ましく、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基であることがより好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~4であることが更に好ましい。
 ここで、本明細書において、単にアルキル基等と記載した場合には、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状、これらの結合により表される構造のいずれをも含むものとする。
 上記アリール基としては、芳香族炭化水素基、芳香族ヘテロ環基のいずれであってもよい。
 上記芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素数6~30の芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基がより好ましく、フェニル基又はナフチル基が更に好ましく、フェニル基が特に好ましい。
 上記芳香族ヘテロ環基としては、特に限定されないが、ヘテロ原子として窒素原子、酸素原子又は硫黄原子を含む芳香族ヘテロ環基が挙げられる。また、上記芳香族ヘテロ環は、5員環又は6員環であることが好ましい。
 また、上記芳香族炭化水素基又は上記芳香族ヘテロ環基は、更に、他の芳香族炭化水素環構造又は芳香族ヘテロ環構造と縮合等により複環を形成していてもよい。
 また、上記アルキル基又はアリール基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
In formula (1), from the viewpoint of moisture resistance, R 1 is preferably a substituent containing an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
As the substituent containing an oxygen atom, a group represented by the following formula (O-1) is preferable.

In formula (O-1), R O1 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and * represents a bonding site with the carbon atom to which R 1 in formula (1) is bonded.
In formula (O-1), R O1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
Here, in this specification, when it is simply described as an alkyl group, etc., it includes any of linear, branched, cyclic, and structures represented by these bonds.
The aryl group may be either an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
The aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, even more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and a phenyl group is more preferable. Particularly preferred.
The above-mentioned aromatic heterocyclic group includes, but is not particularly limited to, an aromatic heterocyclic group containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom as a hetero atom. Further, the aromatic heterocycle is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
Further, the aromatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group may further form a polycyclic ring by condensation or the like with another aromatic hydrocarbon ring structure or aromatic heterocyclic structure.
Moreover, the above alkyl group or aryl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.

 ここで、Rが式(O-1)で表される基である場合、式(1)で表される化合物におけるイミド構造は、転移してアミド構造となっていてもよい。例えばRO1が水素原子である場合、下記のように転移してアミド結合が形成されていてもよい。
Here, when R 1 is a group represented by formula (O-1), the imide structure in the compound represented by formula (1) may be rearranged to become an amide structure. For example, when R O1 is a hydrogen atom, an amide bond may be formed by the following transfer.

 窒素原子を含む置換基としては、下記式(N-1)で表される基が好ましい。

 式(N-1)中、RN1及びRN2はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表し、*は式(1)中のRが結合する炭素原子との結合部位を表す。
 式(N-1)中、RN1及びRN2のうち一方が1価の置換基であり、他方が水素原子である態様も、本発明の好ましい態様の一つである。
 式(N-1)中、RN1及びRN2における1価の置換基としては、炭化水素基が好ましく、アルキル基又はアリール基がより好ましい。
 アルキル基及びアリール基の好ましい態様は、上述の式(O-1)中のRO1におけるアルキル基及びアリール基の好ましい態様と、それぞれ同様である。
 また、上記アルキル基又はアリール基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
As the substituent containing a nitrogen atom, a group represented by the following formula (N-1) is preferable.

In formula (N-1), R N1 and R N2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and * represents the bonding site with the carbon atom to which R 1 in formula (1) is bonded. .
An embodiment in which one of R N1 and R N2 in formula (N-1) is a monovalent substituent and the other is a hydrogen atom is also one of the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
In formula (N-1), the monovalent substituent in R N1 and R N2 is preferably a hydrocarbon group, more preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
Preferred embodiments of the alkyl group and aryl group are the same as the preferred embodiments of the alkyl group and aryl group in R O1 in the above-mentioned formula (O-1).
Moreover, the above alkyl group or aryl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.

 また、耐湿性の観点からは、上記XがCRであって上記R及び上記Rが結合して環構造を形成しているか、又は、上記Rがアリール基、アラルキル基又は炭素数2以上のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 In addition, from the viewpoint of moisture resistance, the above X 2 is CR 2 and the above R 1 and the above R 2 are bonded to form a ring structure, or the above R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or a carbon Preferably, it is an alkyl group of number 2 or more.

 上記XがCRであって上記R及び上記Rが結合して環構造を形成している場合に形成される環構造としては、脂肪族環構造であっても芳香族環構造であってもよいが、脂肪族環構造が好ましい。また、炭化水素環構造であってもヘテロ環構造であってもよい。上記ヘテロ環構造におけるヘテロ原子としては、酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子等が挙げられる。
 また、上記環構造は5員環構造又は6員環構造であることが好ましく、5員環構造であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記環構造は、更に他の環構造と縮合等により複環を形成していてもよい。
When the above X 2 is CR 2 and the above R 1 and the above R 2 are combined to form a ring structure, the ring structure formed may be an aliphatic ring structure or an aromatic ring structure. Although it may exist, an aliphatic ring structure is preferable. Moreover, it may be a hydrocarbon ring structure or a heterocyclic structure. Examples of the heteroatom in the above heterocyclic structure include an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, and the like.
Further, the ring structure is preferably a 5-membered ring structure or a 6-membered ring structure, and more preferably a 5-membered ring structure.
Moreover, the above-mentioned ring structure may further form a double ring by condensation with another ring structure.

 上記R及び上記Rが結合して形成される環構造の例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。下記構造中、X~Xを環員として含む環構造及びヒドロキシ基は、それぞれ式(1)中のX~Xを環員として含む環構造及びヒドロキシ基を表し、*は式(1)中に記載された窒素原子との結合部位を表す。下記構造中のX~Xの好ましい態様は、式(1)中のX~Xの好ましい態様とそれぞれ同様である。
Examples of the ring structure formed by combining the above R 1 and the above R 2 are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the following structure, a ring structure containing X 3 to X 5 as ring members and a hydroxy group respectively represent a ring structure containing X 3 to X 5 as ring members and a hydroxy group in formula (1), and * represents the formula ( 1) Represents the bonding site with the nitrogen atom described in 1). Preferred embodiments of X 3 to X 5 in the following structure are the same as those of X 3 to X 5 in formula (1).

 Rがアリール基、アラルキル基又は炭素数2以上のアルキル基である場合のアリール基の好ましい態様は、上述の式(O-1)中のRO1におけるアリール基の好ましい態様と、それぞれ同様である。
 上記アリール基としては特に限定されないが、例えば、フェニル基、フラニル基等が挙げられる。
 Rがアリール基、アラルキル基又は炭素数2以上のアルキル基である場合のアラルキル基におけるアリール基の好ましい態様は、上述の式(O-1)中のRO1におけるアリール基の好ましい態様と、それぞれ同様である。上記アラルキル基におけるアルキル基としては、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基が更に好ましい。
 上記アラルキル基としては特に限定されないが、例えば、ベンジル基、フェニルエチル基等が挙げられる。
 上記炭素数2以上のアルキル基としては、炭素数2~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数2~10のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルキル基が更に好ましい。
 上記アルキル基としては特に限定されないが、例えば、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基等が挙げられる。
 Rがアリール基、アラルキル基又は炭素数2以上のアルキル基である場合、これらの基は更に置換基を有してもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
Preferred embodiments of the aryl group when R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms are the same as the preferred embodiments of the aryl group in R O1 in the above formula (O-1). be.
The above-mentioned aryl group is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, a phenyl group, a furanyl group, and the like.
Preferred embodiments of the aryl group in the aralkyl group when R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms are the preferred embodiments of the aryl group in R O1 in the above formula (O-1), Each is similar. The alkyl group in the above aralkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
The aralkyl group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a benzyl group and a phenylethyl group.
The alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
The above-mentioned alkyl group is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, and the like.
When R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms, these groups may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.

 式(1)中、XはCR又は窒素原子を表し、Rは、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 Rが表す上記置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
In formula (1), X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom, and R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Examples of the above-mentioned substituent represented by R 2 include substituent T described below.

 式(1)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、窒素原子、CH又はCRを表す。
 例えば、X~Xの全てがCH又はCRである態様、Xが窒素原子であって他がCH又はCRである態様、又は、Xが窒素原子であって他がCH又はCRである態様が好ましい態様として挙げられる。
 Rは置換基を表し、置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
 また、Rが表す上記置換基は、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子(ハロゲノ基)、ニトロ基、シアノ基、-NR101102、-OR103、-SR104、-COOR105、-OCOR106、-SO107、-SONR108109、-SOOR110、-CONR111112又はNR113COR114であることが好ましく、ニトロ基、シアノ基、-NR101102、-OR103、-SR104、-COOR105又はCONR111112であることがより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましく、1又は2であることが特に好ましい。
 上記ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、塩素原子又は臭素原子が好ましい。
 R101及びR102はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R101とR102は結合して環を形成していてもよく、R103~R114はそれぞれ独立して、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。
 R101~R114が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましく、1又は2であることが特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状又は分岐状が好ましく、直鎖状がより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。R101~R114が表すアルキル基は、メチル基又はエチル基であることが好ましい。
 R101~R114が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。
 R101とR102は結合して環を形成していてもよい。R101とR102が結合して形成される環としては、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環などが挙げられる。
In formula (1), X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x .
For example, an embodiment in which all of X 3 to X 9 are CH or CR x , an embodiment in which X 6 is a nitrogen atom and the others are CH or CR x , or an embodiment in which X 3 is a nitrogen atom and the others are CH or An embodiment in which it is CR x is mentioned as a preferred embodiment.
R x represents a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.
Further, the above - mentioned substituents represented by R SO 2 R 107 , -SO 2 NR 108 R 109 , -SO 2 OR 110 , -CONR 111 R 112 or NR 113 COR 114 are preferable, and a nitro group, a cyano group, -NR 101 R 102 , -OR 103 , -SR 104 , -COOR 105 or CONR 111 R 112 are more preferred.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2.
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, and the like, with a chlorine atom or a bromine atom being preferred.
R 101 and R 102 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, R 101 and R 102 may be combined to form a ring, and R 103 to R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group; , represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below. The alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 101 to R 114 is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 12. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.
R 101 and R 102 may be combined to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed by combining R 101 and R 102 include a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, a piperazine ring, and a morpholine ring.

 R101及びR102はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子又はアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子、メチル基又はエチル基であることがより好ましい。R103~R114はそれぞれ独立して、アルキル基であることが好ましく、メチル基又はエチル基であることがより好ましい。 R 101 and R 102 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group. R 103 to R 114 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, more preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.

 R及びRの合計数が2以上である場合、R及びRのうち少なくとも2つは結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、炭化水素環であってもよく、ヘテロ環であってもよい。また、炭化水素環は脂肪族炭化水素環であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素環であってもよい。ヘテロ環に含まれるヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、硫黄原子及び酸素原子が挙げられる。ヘテロ環は5員環又は6員環であることが好ましい。形成される環の具体例としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ピレン環、ペリレン環などの炭化水素環、ジオキサン環、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、イミダゾール環、ピラゾ―ル環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イミダゾリン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、インドール環、イソインドール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、ベンゾオキサゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、ベンゾトリアゾール環、プリン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、キナゾリン環、キノキサリン環、シンノリン環、プテリジン環、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、テトラヒドロフラン環、テトラヒドロピラン環、テトラヒドロチオフェン環、テトラヒドロチオピラン環などのヘテロ環が挙げられる。上記形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。 When the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, at least two of R 2 and R x may be combined to form a ring. The ring formed may be a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocycle. Further, the hydrocarbon ring may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. Examples of the heteroatom contained in the heterocycle include a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, and an oxygen atom. Preferably, the heterocycle is a 5- or 6-membered ring. Specific examples of rings formed include hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pyrene ring, perylene ring, dioxane ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyridine ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, Oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazoline ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, indole ring, isoindole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, benzotriazole ring, purine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, Examples include heterocycles such as a quinazoline ring, a quinoxaline ring, a cinnoline ring, a pteridine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, a tetrahydrofuran ring, a tetrahydropyran ring, a tetrahydrothiophene ring, and a tetrahydrothiopyran ring. The ring formed above may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described below.

 化合物Yにおいて、式(1)で表される化合物が配位する金属原子としては、Cu、Zn、Ni、Pd、Ti、Mn、Co、Al又はFeを含むことが好ましく、金属原子と配位子との結合が強くなり、金属部分が加水分解しにくくなる観点からは、Cu、Zn、Ni又はPdを含むことがより好ましい。 In compound Y, the metal atom to which the compound represented by formula (1) coordinates preferably contains Cu, Zn, Ni, Pd, Ti, Mn, Co, Al, or Fe, and the metal atom coordinates with the metal atom. It is more preferable to contain Cu, Zn, Ni, or Pd from the viewpoint of strengthening the bond with the child and making the metal part difficult to hydrolyze.

 化合物Yは、金属原子に、式(1)で表される化合物が1個配位していてもよく、2個以上配位していてもよい。また、金属原子には、式(1)で表される化合物以外の配位子が更に配位していてもよい。配位子としてはヘテロ環化合物(例えば、ピリジン、ピリミジン、イミダゾール、ピラゾール、トリアゾール、テトラゾール、キノリン、1,10-フェナントロリン等)、プロトン性化合物(例えば、水、メタノール、エタノール等)、アミン化合物(例えばトリエチルアミン、N,N,N’、N’-テトラメチレンジアミン、エチレンジアミン四酢酸N,N,N’,N’’,N’’-ペンタメチルジエチレントリアミンなど)、アミド化合物(例えば、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドン等)、ジメチルスルホキシド、スルホラン、ニトリル化合物(例えばアセトニトリル等)などが挙げられる。また、化合物Yは2核錯体であってもよい。化合物Yの一例としては、下記式(1-1)で表される化合物、式(1-2)で表される化合物、式(1-3)で表される化合物及び式(1-4)で表される化合物などが挙げられる。以下の式中、M~Mは、それぞれ独立して金属原子を表す。また、化合物Yは、金属原子に対し配位子が1:3の比で配位している化合物、金属原子に対し配位子が金属原子:配位子=1:4の比で配位している化合物、金属原子に対し配位子が金属原子:配位子=2:3の比で配位している化合物、金属原子に対し配位子が金属原子:配位子=3:3の比で配位している化合物であってもよい。また、金属原子から配位子の一部が乖離していたり、配位子以外の化合物が金属原子に配位していてもよい。
In compound Y, one compound represented by formula (1) may be coordinated to the metal atom, or two or more compounds may be coordinated to the metal atom. Moreover, a ligand other than the compound represented by formula (1) may be further coordinated to the metal atom. Ligands include heterocyclic compounds (for example, pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (for example, water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds ( For example, triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''-pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (for example, N,N- dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, etc.), dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, and nitrile compounds (eg, acetonitrile, etc.). Further, compound Y may be a dinuclear complex. Examples of the compound Y include a compound represented by the following formula (1-1), a compound represented by the formula (1-2), a compound represented by the formula (1-3), and a compound represented by the formula (1-4). Examples include compounds represented by: In the following formula, M 1 to M 5 each independently represent a metal atom. Compound Y is a compound in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom in a ratio of 1:3, and a compound in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom in a ratio of metal atom:ligand = 1:4. Compounds in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom in a ratio of metal atom:ligand = 2:3; a compound in which a ligand is coordinated to a metal atom in a ratio of metal atom:ligand = 3: It may be a compound that is coordinated in a ratio of 3. Further, a part of the ligand may be separated from the metal atom, or a compound other than the ligand may be coordinated to the metal atom.

 化合物Yは、酸基又は塩基性基を有する化合物であってもよい。
 例えば、式(1)で表される化合物は酸基又は塩基性基を有する構造であってもよい。
 酸基又は塩基性基は、例えば、式(1)におけるR又はRに導入される。
 金属原子にこのような式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Yは、例えば分散助剤として用いられる場合もある。分散助剤とは、着色組成物中において顔料の分散性を高めるための素材のことである。
 式(1)で表される化合物における酸基及び塩基性基の好ましい態様は、それぞれ、後述する顔料誘導体の酸基及び塩基性基の好ましい態様と同様である。
 また、例えば、化合物Yにおいて、式(1)で表される化合物以外の配位子であって、酸基又は塩基性基を有する配位子が更に配位してもよい。このような化合物Yも、上述の分散助剤として用いられる場合が有る。このような配位子における酸基及び塩基性基の好ましい態様も、それぞれ、後述する顔料誘導体の酸基及び塩基性基の好ましい態様と同様である。
 ここで、化合物Yが酸基又は塩基性基を有する場合、本発明の着色組成物は、顔料を更に含むことが好ましい場合が有る。上記顔料は、化合物Yに該当する顔料であってもよいし、後述する「化合物Y以外の着色剤」に該当する顔料であってもよい。
Compound Y may be a compound having an acid group or a basic group.
For example, the compound represented by formula (1) may have a structure having an acid group or a basic group.
The acid group or basic group is introduced into R 2 or R x in formula (1), for example.
Compound Y, in which the compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom, may be used, for example, as a dispersion aid. A dispersion aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of pigments in a coloring composition.
Preferred embodiments of the acid group and basic group in the compound represented by formula (1) are the same as those of the acid group and basic group of the pigment derivative described later.
Further, for example, in compound Y, a ligand other than the compound represented by formula (1) and having an acid group or a basic group may further coordinate. Such compound Y may also be used as the above-mentioned dispersion aid. Preferred embodiments of the acid group and basic group in such a ligand are also the same as the preferred embodiments of the acid group and basic group of the pigment derivative described later.
Here, when the compound Y has an acid group or a basic group, it may be preferable that the coloring composition of the present invention further contains a pigment. The above-mentioned pigment may be a pigment that corresponds to compound Y, or may be a pigment that corresponds to "coloring agent other than compound Y", which will be described later.

(置換基T)
 上述した置換基Tとして、次の基が挙げられる。ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキル基)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルケニル基)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルキニル基)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリール基)、ヘテロ環基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環基)、アミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のアミノ基)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルコキシ基)、アリールオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールオキシ基)、ヘテロ環オキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環オキシ基)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシル基)、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルコキシカルボニル基)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数7~30のアリールオキシカルボニル基)、ヘテロ環オキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のヘテロ環オキシカルボニル基)、アシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシルオキシ基)、アシルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシルアミノ基)、アミノカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアミノカルボニルアミノ基)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルコキシカルボニルアミノ基)、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数7~30のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のスルファモイル基)、スルファモイルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のスルファモイルアミノ基)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のカルバモイル基)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルチオ基)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールチオ基)、ヘテロ環チオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環チオ基)、アルキルスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルホニル基)、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルホニルアミノ基)、アリールスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルホニル基)、アリールスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルホニルアミノ基)、ヘテロ環スルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環スルホニル基)、ヘテロ環スルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環スルホニルアミノ基)、アルキルスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルフィニル基)、アリールスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルフィニル基)、ヘテロ環スルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロ環スルフィニル基)、ウレイド基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のウレイド基)、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、カルボン酸アミド基、スルホン酸アミド基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、メルカプト基、シアノ基、アルキルスルフィノ基、アリールスルフィノ基、アリールアゾ基、ヘテロ環アゾ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基。これらの基は、更に置換可能な基である場合、更に置換基を有してもよい。
(Substituent T)
Examples of the above-mentioned substituent T include the following groups. Halogen atom (e.g. fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkenyl group (preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), alkynyl group (preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), a heterocyclic group (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an amino group (preferably an amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an aryloxy group (preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), a heterocyclic oxy group (preferably a carbon acyl group (preferably an acyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms), heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group (preferably heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), acyloxy group (preferably acyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), acylamino group (preferably an acylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), an aminocarbonylamino group (preferably an aminocarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably an alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) , an aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably an aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms), a sulfamoyl group (preferably a sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms), a sulfamoylamino group (preferably a sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms) sulfamoylamino group), carbamoyl group (preferably a carbamoyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably an alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an arylthio group (preferably an arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms) group), a heterocyclic thio group (preferably a heterocyclic thio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfonylamino group (preferably a carbon number 1 to 30), 30 alkylsulfonylamino group), an arylsulfonyl group (preferably an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), an arylsulfonylamino group (preferably an arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), a heterocyclic sulfonyl group (preferably an arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), is a heterocyclic sulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), a heterocyclic sulfonylamino group (preferably a heterocyclic sulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfinyl group (preferably an alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) , an arylsulfinyl group (preferably an arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), a heterocyclic sulfinyl group (preferably a heterocyclic sulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), a ureido group (preferably a ureido group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) ), hydroxy group, nitro group, carboxy group, sulfo group, phosphoric acid group, carboxylic acid amide group, sulfonic acid amide group, imide group, phosphino group, mercapto group, cyano group, alkylsulfino group, arylsulfino group, Aryl azo group, heterocyclic azo group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, silyl group, hydrazino group, imino group. These groups may further have a substituent when the group is a substitutable group.

 化合物Yは、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。 Compound Y may be a pigment or a dye.

 化合物Yの極大吸収波長は、波長350~700nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく、波長350~600nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましく、波長350~500nmの範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。 The maximum absorption wavelength of compound Y is preferably in the wavelength range of 350 to 700 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 350 to 600 nm, and even more preferably in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm.

 化合物Yが顔料の場合、化合物Yの平均一次粒子径は、1~200nmが好ましい。下限は5nm以上が好ましく、10nm以上がより好ましい。上限は、180nm以下が好ましく、150nm以下がより好ましく、100nm以下が更に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、顔料の一次粒子径は、顔料の一次粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた写真から求めることができる。具体的には、顔料の一次粒子の投影面積を求め、それに対応する円相当径を顔料の一次粒子径として算出する。また、本発明における平均一次粒子径は、400個の顔料の一次粒子についての一次粒子径の算術平均値とする。また、顔料の一次粒子とは、凝集のない独立した粒子をいう。
 顔料の平均一次粒子径は、後述の実施例に記載したように、例えば混練研磨処理等により調整することができる。混練研磨処理は特に限定されず、公知の方法により行うことができる。また、顔料の平均一次粒子径は、合成時又は使用時に、他の公知の方法により調整されてもよい。
When compound Y is a pigment, the average primary particle diameter of compound Y is preferably 1 to 200 nm. The lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more. The upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less. In this specification, the primary particle diameter of the pigment can be determined from a photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment using a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is determined, and the corresponding circular equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment. Further, the average primary particle diameter in the present invention is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle diameters of 400 pigment primary particles. Moreover, the primary particles of pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
The average primary particle diameter of the pigment can be adjusted, for example, by kneading and polishing, as described in the Examples below. The kneading and polishing treatment is not particularly limited, and can be performed by a known method. Further, the average primary particle size of the pigment may be adjusted by other known methods during synthesis or use.

 化合物Yが顔料の場合、CuKα線をX線源としたときのX線回折スペクトルにおけるいずれかの結晶面に由来するピークの半値幅より求めた結晶子サイズは、0.1~100nmであることが好ましく、0.5~50nmであることがより好ましい。 If compound Y is a pigment, the crystallite size determined from the half-width of the peak derived from any crystal plane in the X-ray diffraction spectrum when CuKα rays are used as the X-ray source must be 0.1 to 100 nm. is preferable, and more preferably 0.5 to 50 nm.

 化合物Yは、例えば、後述の実施例に記載した方法により合成することができる。ただし、化合物Yの合成方法は特に限定されず、化合物Yは金属原子に式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物であれば、いかなる合成方法により得られたものであってもよい。
 化合物Yの合成に際しては、活性炭やシリカゲルなどを用いる精製処理を行った原料を用いても良い。精製処理に用いる吸着剤としては、活性炭、シリカゲル、ゼオライト、合成吸着剤、フロリジルが挙げられる。これらの素材は、粉末状あるいはペレット状のものが好適に用いられる。精製処理は、有機溶剤や水に原料を溶解させ、溶解液をフィルタ状吸着剤に通液させる方法や溶解液中に吸着剤を投入し撹拌させる方法が好適である。精製処理に用いられる吸着剤量は、原料1質量部に対して、0.01~10質量部であることが好ましい。原料を溶解させる有機溶剤は、メタノール、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、アセトニトリル、テトラヒドロフラン、シクロペンタノン、N-メチル-2-ピロリドンなどが好適に用いられる。吸着剤を濾別後に有機溶剤を留去し、貧溶媒添加による晶析により精製した原料を得ることができる。
Compound Y can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in Examples below. However, the synthesis method of compound Y is not particularly limited, and compound Y may be obtained by any synthesis method as long as it is a compound in which the compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom. Good too.
When synthesizing compound Y, raw materials that have been purified using activated carbon, silica gel, or the like may be used. Adsorbents used for purification include activated carbon, silica gel, zeolite, synthetic adsorbents, and Florisil. These materials are preferably in the form of powder or pellets. Suitable purification treatments include a method in which the raw material is dissolved in an organic solvent or water and the dissolved solution is passed through a filter-like adsorbent, or a method in which the adsorbent is introduced into the dissolved solution and stirred. The amount of adsorbent used in the purification treatment is preferably 0.01 to 10 parts by mass per 1 part by mass of the raw material. As the organic solvent for dissolving the raw materials, methanol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, cyclopentanone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, etc. are preferably used. After the adsorbent is filtered off, the organic solvent is distilled off, and a purified raw material can be obtained by crystallization by adding a poor solvent.

 化合物Yの具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の化合物(Y-1)~(Y-46)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of compound Y include compounds (Y-1) to (Y-46) described in Examples below.

 着色組成物の全固形分中における化合物Yの含有量は、1~80質量%以下であることが好ましい。着色組成物の全固形分中における化合物Yの含有量の下限値は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、4質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。含有量の上限値は、75質量%以下であることが好ましく、70質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 ここで、着色組成物が後述する化合物Y以外の着色剤を更に含有する場合、化合物Yの含有量は、1~30質量%であることが好ましい場合が有る。上記含有量の下限値は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、4質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。含有量の上限値は、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 また、着色組成物が後述する重合性化合物及び重合開始剤の少なくとも一方を含有する(重合性化合物及び重合開始剤を含有することも好ましい態様である)場合、化合物Yの含有量は、1~30質量%であることが好ましい場合が有る。上記含有量の下限値は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、3質量%以上であることがより好ましく、4質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。含有量の上限値は、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 化合物Yは1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上併用する場合はそれらの合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of compound Y in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 80% by mass or less. The lower limit of the content of compound Y in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 4% by mass or more. . The upper limit of the content is preferably 75% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less.
Here, when the coloring composition further contains a coloring agent other than Compound Y, which will be described later, the content of Compound Y may preferably be 1 to 30% by mass. The lower limit of the content is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 4% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less.
In addition, when the coloring composition contains at least one of a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator described below (containing a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator is also a preferred embodiment), the content of compound Y is 1 to 1. In some cases, the content is preferably 30% by mass. The lower limit of the content is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 4% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less.
Only one type of compound Y may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤は、上記化合物Y以外の着色剤をさらに含有することができる。併用する他の着色剤としては、緑色着色剤、赤色着色剤、黄色着色剤、紫色着色剤、青色着色剤、オレンジ色着色剤などの有彩色着色剤、黒色着色剤などが挙げられる。他の着色剤としては、緑色着色剤、赤色着色剤及びオレンジ色着色剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、緑色着色剤及び赤色着色剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることがより好ましく、緑色着色剤であることが更に好ましい。他の着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよいが、顔料であることが好ましい。 The coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a coloring agent other than the above compound Y. Examples of other coloring agents used in combination include chromatic coloring agents such as green coloring agents, red coloring agents, yellow coloring agents, purple coloring agents, blue coloring agents, and orange coloring agents, and black coloring agents. The other colorant is preferably at least one selected from green colorants, red colorants, and orange colorants, and more preferably at least one selected from green colorants and red colorants. , more preferably a green colorant. The other coloring agent may be a pigment or a dye, but is preferably a pigment.

 顔料の平均一次粒子径は、1~200nmが好ましい。下限は5nm以上が好ましく、10nm以上がより好ましい。上限は、180nm以下が好ましく、150nm以下がより好ましく、100nm以下が更に好ましい。顔料の平均一次粒子径が上記範囲であれば、着色樹脂組成物中における顔料の分散安定性が良好である。 The average primary particle diameter of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm. The lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more. The upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less. When the average primary particle diameter of the pigment is within the above range, the dispersion stability of the pigment in the colored resin composition is good.

 赤色着色剤としては、ジケトピロロピロール化合物、アントラキノン化合物、アゾ化合物、ナフトール化合物、アゾメチン化合物、キサンテン化合物、キナクリドン化合物、ペリレン化合物、チオインジゴ化合物などが挙げられ、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由から、ジケトピロロピロール化合物、アントラキノン化合物、アゾ化合物であることが好ましく、ジケトピロロピロール化合物であることがより好ましい。また、赤色着色剤は顔料であることが好ましい。 Examples of red colorants include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, and thioindigo compounds, which form a film with better light resistance. Because they are easy to use, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, and azo compounds are preferred, and diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds are more preferred. Moreover, it is preferable that the red colorant is a pigment.

 赤色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.(カラーインデックス)ピグメントレッド1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291,294,295,296,297等の赤色顔料が挙げられる。また、赤色着色剤として、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0034に記載の化合物、特開2020-085947号公報に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物を用いることもできる。 Specific examples of red colorants include C.I. I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48:1, 48:2, 48:3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81:3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, Examples include red pigments such as 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, 297, and the like. Further, as a red colorant, a compound described in paragraph number 0034 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 and a brominated diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in JP 2020-085947 can also be used.

 赤色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントレッド122,177,254,255,264,269,272が好ましく、C.I.ピグメントレッド254,264,272がより好ましく、C.I.ピグメントレッド254,264が更に好ましい。 As the red colorant, C. I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 254, 255, 264, 269, 272 are preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 264, and 272 are more preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 and 264 are more preferred.

 緑色着色剤としては、フタロシアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物などが挙げられ、より耐光性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由から、フタロシアニン化合物であることが好ましい。また、緑色着色剤は顔料であることが好ましい。 Examples of the green coloring agent include phthalocyanine compounds and squarylium compounds, and phthalocyanine compounds are preferred because they facilitate the formation of a film with better light resistance. Moreover, it is preferable that the green coloring agent is a pigment.

 緑色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,10,36,37,58,59,62,63,64,65,66等の緑色顔料が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0029に記載の化合物特開2020-070426号公報に記載のアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物、特表2020-504758号公報に記載のジアリールメタン化合物などを用いることもできる。 Specific examples of green colorants include C.I. I. Examples include green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, and 66. In addition, as a green coloring agent, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine has an average number of 10 to 14 halogen atoms, an average of 8 to 12 bromine atoms, and an average of 2 to 5 chlorine atoms in one molecule. Pigments can also be used. Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. In addition, as a green coloring agent, compounds described in paragraph number 0029 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, aluminum phthalocyanine compounds described in JP-A No. 2020-070426, diarylmethane compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-504758, etc. It can also be used.

 緑色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,36,58,62,63が好ましい。
用いられる。
As the green colorant, C. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 62, and 63 are preferred.
used.

 オレンジ色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等のオレンジ色顔料が挙げられる。 Specific examples of orange colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. orange pigments.

 黄色着色剤としては、アゾ化合物、アゾメチン化合物、イソインドリン化合物、プテリジン化合物、キノフタロン化合物及びペリレン化合物が挙げられる。黄色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236等の黄色顔料が挙げられる。 Examples of yellow colorants include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds, and perylene compounds. Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36:1, 37, 37:1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 179, Examples include yellow pigments such as 180, 181, 182, 185, 187, 188, 193, 194, 199, 213, 214, 215, 228, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236.

 また、黄色着色剤としては、下記構造のアゾバルビツール酸ニッケル錯体を用いることもできる。
Further, as the yellow coloring agent, an azobarbituric acid nickel complex having the following structure can also be used.

 また、黄色着色剤として、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0031~0033に記載の化合物、特開2019-073695号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073696号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073697号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073698号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2020-093994号公報に記載のアゾ化合物を用いることができる。 In addition, as a yellow coloring agent, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0031 to 0033 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, methine dyes described in JP 2019-073695, methine dyes described in JP 2019-073696, , the methine dye described in JP 2019-073697, the methine dye described in JP 2019-073698, and the azo compound described in JP 2020-093994.

 紫色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等の紫色顔料が挙げられる。 Specific examples of purple colorants include C.I. I. Examples include purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, and 61.

 青色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントブルー1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等の青色顔料が挙げられる。また、青色着色剤として、リン原子を有するアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2012-247591号公報の段落番号0022~0030、特開2011-157478号公報の段落番号0047に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of blue colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15:1, 15:2, 15:3, 15:4, 15:6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88, etc. Examples include pigments. Moreover, an aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue colorant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2012-247591 and paragraph number 0047 of JP-A No. 2011-157478.

 また、有彩色着色剤として、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0028160号公報に記載されたトリアリールメタン染料ポリマー、特開2020-117638号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物、国際公開第2020/174991号に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-160279号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物又はそれらの塩、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069442号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069730号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069070号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069067号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069062号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、特許第6809649号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料、特開2020-180176号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、特開2021-187913号公報に記載のフェノチアジン系化合物、国際公開第2022/004261号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン、国際公開第2021/250883号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニンを用いることができる。顔料又は染料は、ロタキサンであってもよく、色素骨格はロタキサンの環状構造に使用されていてもよく、棒状構造に使用されていてもよく、両方の構造に使用されていてもよい。有彩色着色剤として、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0030759号公報の式1で表されるキノフタロン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0061793号公報に記載の高分子染料、特開2022-029701号公報に記載の着色剤、国際公開第2022/014635号に記載のイソインドリン化合物、国際公開第2022/024926号に記載のアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を使用してもよい。 In addition, as chromatic colorants, triarylmethane dye polymers described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0028160, xanthene compounds described in JP 2020-117638, and International Publication No. 2020/174991 are also used. The phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A No. 2020-160279 or a salt thereof, the compound represented by formula 1 described in Korean Published Patent No. 10-2020-0069442, Korean Published Patent No. 10 Compounds represented by formula 1 described in -2020-0069730, compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean published patent No. 10-2020-0069070, Korean published patent No. 10-2020-0069067 Compounds represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069062, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments described in Patent No. 6809649, JP-A-2020- Isoindoline compounds described in JP 180176, phenothiazine compounds described in JP 2021-187913, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine described in WO 2022/004261, halogens described in WO 2021/250883 Zinc phthalocyanine can be used. The pigment or dye may be a rotaxane, and the dye backbone may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, in the rod-like structure, or in both structures. As a chromatic coloring agent, a quinophthalone compound represented by formula 1 of Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0030759, a polymer dye described in Korean Publication Patent No. 10-2020-0061793, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2022-029701. You may use the coloring agent described in WO 2022/014635, the isoindoline compound described in WO 2022/024926, and the aluminum phthalocyanine compound described in WO 2022/024926.

 黒色着色剤としては、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、ペリレン化合物、アゾ化合物などが挙げられ、ビスベンゾフラノン化合物、ペリレン化合物が好ましい。ビスベンゾフラノン化合物としては、特表2010-534726号公報、特表2012-515233号公報、特表2012-515234号公報などに記載の化合物が挙げられ、例えば、BASF社製の「Irgaphor Black」として入手可能である。ペリレン化合物としては、特開2017-226821号公報の段落番号0016~0020に記載の化合物、C.I.Pigment Black 31,32などが挙げられる。アゾメチン化合物としては、特開平01-170601号公報、特開平02-034664号公報などに記載の化合物が挙げられ、例えば、大日精化社製の「クロモファインブラックA1103」として入手できる。また、黒色色材として、特許第6985715号公報に記載の黒色有機顔料、Lumogen Black FK4280、Paliogen Black S0084(BASF社製)を使用してもよい。 Examples of the black colorant include bisbenzofuranone compounds, azomethine compounds, perylene compounds, and azo compounds, with bisbenzofuranone compounds and perylene compounds being preferred. Examples of bisbenzofuranone compounds include compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-534726, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-515233, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-515234, and for example, as "Irgaphor Black" manufactured by BASF. available. Examples of perylene compounds include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0016 to 0020 of JP-A No. 2017-226821, C.I. I. Pigment Black 31, 32, etc. Examples of the azomethine compound include compounds described in JP-A-01-170601 and JP-A-02-034664, and are available as "Chromofine Black A1103" manufactured by Dainichiseika Kaisha, Ltd., for example. Further, as a black coloring material, a black organic pigment described in Japanese Patent No. 6985715, Lumogen Black FK4280, Paliogen Black S0084 (manufactured by BASF) may be used.

 各種顔料が有していることが好ましい回折角については、特許第6561862号公報、特許第6413872号公報、特許第6281345号公報、特開2020-026503号公報、特開2020-033526号公報の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、ピロロピロール系顔料としては結晶格子面のうち(±1±1±1)の8個の面の中でX線回折パターンにおける最大ピークに対応する面方向の結晶子サイズが140Å以下であるものを用いることも好ましい。また、ピロロピロール系顔料の物性については、特開2020-097744号公報の段落番号0028~0073に記載の通り設定することも好ましい。 Regarding the diffraction angles that various pigments preferably have, see the descriptions in Japanese Patent No. 6561862, Japanese Patent No. 6413872, Japanese Patent No. 6281345, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-026503, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-033526. , the contents of which are incorporated herein. Furthermore, as a pyrrolopyrrole pigment, the crystallite size in the plane direction corresponding to the maximum peak in the X-ray diffraction pattern among the eight (±1±1±1) crystal lattice planes is 140 Å or less. It is also preferable to use Furthermore, it is also preferable to set the physical properties of the pyrrolopyrrole pigment as described in paragraphs 0028 to 0073 of JP-A-2020-097744.

 顔料のCuKα線をX線源としたときのX線回折スペクトルにおけるいずれかの結晶面に由来するピークの半値幅より求めた結晶子サイズは、0.1~100nmであることが好ましく、0.5~50nmであることがより好ましく、1~30nmであることが更に好ましく、5~25nmであることが特に好ましい。 The crystallite size determined from the half-value width of the peak derived from any crystal plane in the X-ray diffraction spectrum when the CuKα ray of the pigment is used as the X-ray source is preferably 0.1 to 100 nm, and preferably 0.1 to 100 nm. It is more preferably from 5 to 50 nm, even more preferably from 1 to 30 nm, and particularly preferably from 5 to 25 nm.

 顔料の比表面積は1~300m/gであることが好ましい。下限は10m/g以上であることが好ましく、30m/g以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、250m/g以下であることが好ましく、200m/g以下であることがより好ましい。比表面積の値は、BET(Brunauer、Emmett及びTeller)法に準じてDIN 66131:determination of the specific surface area  of solids by gas adsorption(ガス吸着による固体の比表面積の測定)に従って測定することができる。 The specific surface area of the pigment is preferably 1 to 300 m 2 /g. The lower limit is preferably 10 m 2 /g or more, more preferably 30 m 2 /g or more. The upper limit is preferably 250 m 2 /g or less, more preferably 200 m 2 /g or less. The value of the specific surface area is determined according to DIN 66131: determination of the specific surface area of solids by gas adsorption according to the BET (Brunauer, Emmett and Teller) method. (Measurement of specific surface area of solids).

 本発明の着色組成物が、緑色着色剤を含む場合は、カラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。また、本発明の着色組成物が、赤色着色剤を含む場合は、カラーフィルタの赤色画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a green colorant, it is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter. Moreover, when the coloring composition of the present invention contains a red colorant, it is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter.

 また、着色組成物に含まれる着色剤は、2種以上の有彩色着色剤を含み、かつ、2種以上の有彩色着色剤の組み合わせで黒色を形成していてもよい。このような着色組成物は、赤外線透過フィルタ形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。2種以上の有彩色着色剤の組み合わせで黒色を形成する場合の有彩色着色剤の組み合わせとしては以下が挙げられる。
 (1)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤と黄色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (2)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤と黄色着色剤と紫色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (3)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤と黄色着色剤と紫色着色剤と緑色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (4)赤色着色剤と青色着色剤と黄色着色剤と緑色着色剤とを含有する態様。
 (5)黄色着色剤と紫色着色剤とを含有する態様。
Moreover, the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition may include two or more types of chromatic coloring agents, and black may be formed by a combination of two or more types of chromatic coloring agents. Such a colored composition is preferably used as a colored composition for forming an infrared transmission filter. Examples of combinations of chromatic colorants in the case where black color is formed by a combination of two or more chromatic colorants include the following.
(1) Embodiment containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, and a yellow colorant.
(2) An embodiment containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, a yellow colorant, and a purple colorant.
(3) An embodiment containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, a yellow colorant, a purple colorant, and a green colorant.
(4) An embodiment containing a red colorant, a blue colorant, a yellow colorant, and a green colorant.
(5) Embodiment containing a yellow colorant and a purple colorant.

 着色組成物の全固形分中における着色剤の含有量は、40質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、55質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、80質量%以下であることが好ましく、75質量%以下であることがより好ましく、70質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 55% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, and even more preferably 70% by mass or less.

 着色剤として、化合物Yとは異なる着色剤を含む場合、着色剤中における化合物Yの含有量は、1~25質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、4質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は20質量%以下であることが好ましい。 When a colorant different from Compound Y is included as a colorant, the content of Compound Y in the colorant is preferably 1 to 25% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 4% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less.

 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、着色剤には黄色着色剤と緑色着色剤を含むものを用いることが好ましい。また、化合物Yは黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。すなわち、黄色着色剤は化合物Yを含むものであることが好ましい。黄色着色剤と緑色着色剤との質量比は、緑色着色剤100質量部に対して黄色着色剤が1~100質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、90質量部以下であることが好ましく、80質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、5質量部以上であることが好ましく、10質量部以上であることがより好ましい。また、化合物Yの含有量は、緑色着色剤の100質量部に対して1~60質量部であることが好ましい。下限は、5質量部以上であることが好ましく、10質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、50質量部以下であることが好ましく、40質量部以下であることがより好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a colorant containing a yellow colorant and a green colorant. Moreover, it is preferable that compound Y is a yellow coloring agent. That is, it is preferable that the yellow colorant contains compound Y. The mass ratio of the yellow colorant to the green colorant is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass of the yellow colorant to 100 parts by mass of the green colorant. The upper limit is preferably 90 parts by mass or less, more preferably 80 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more. Further, the content of compound Y is preferably 1 to 60 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the green colorant. The lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.

 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの赤色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、着色剤には黄色着色剤と赤色着色剤を含むものを用いることが好ましい。また、化合物Yは黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。すなわち、黄色着色剤は化合物Yを含むものであることが好ましい。黄色着色剤と赤色着色剤との質量比は、赤色着色剤100質量部に対して黄色着色剤が1~100質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、90質量部以下であることが好ましく、80質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、5質量部以上であることが好ましく、10質量部以上であることがより好ましい。また、化合物Yの含有量は、赤色着色剤の100質量部に対して1~60質量部であることが好ましい。下限は、5質量部以上であることが好ましく、10質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、50質量部以下であることが好ましく、40質量部以下であることがより好ましい。 When using the coloring composition of the present invention as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a colorant containing a yellow colorant and a red colorant. Moreover, it is preferable that compound Y is a yellow coloring agent. That is, it is preferable that the yellow colorant contains compound Y. The mass ratio of the yellow colorant to the red colorant is preferably 1 to 100 parts by mass of the yellow colorant to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant. The upper limit is preferably 90 parts by mass or less, more preferably 80 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more. Further, the content of compound Y is preferably 1 to 60 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the red colorant. The lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.

 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの黄色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、着色剤中における黄色着色剤の含有量は30質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上であることがより好ましく、50質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、化合物Yは黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。すなわち、黄色着色剤は化合物Yを含むものであることが好ましい。 When using the coloring composition of the present invention as a coloring composition for forming yellow pixels of a color filter, the content of the yellow colorant in the colorant is preferably 30% by mass or more, and preferably 40% by mass or more. is more preferable, and even more preferably 50% by mass or more. Moreover, it is preferable that compound Y is a yellow coloring agent. That is, it is preferable that the yellow colorant contains compound Y.

<<樹脂>>
 本発明の着色組成物は樹脂を含む。樹脂は、例えば、顔料などを着色組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料などを着色組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。
<<Resin>>
The colored composition of the present invention contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for dispersing pigments in a coloring composition or for use as a binder. Note that a resin used mainly for dispersing pigments and the like in a coloring composition is also referred to as a dispersant. However, this use of the resin is just an example, and the resin can also be used for purposes other than this use.

 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、3000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下が好ましく、500000以下がより好ましい。下限は、4000以上が好ましく、5000以上がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000. The upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.

 樹脂としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、シロキサン樹脂などが挙げられる。また、樹脂としては、国際公開第2016/088645号の実施例に記載された樹脂、特開2017-057265号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-032685号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-075248号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-066240号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-167513号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-173787号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-206689号公報の段落番号0041~0060に記載された樹脂、特開2018-010856号公報の段落番号0022~0071に記載された樹脂、特開2016-222891号公報に記載されたブロックポリイソシアネート樹脂、特開2020-122052号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-111656号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-138503号公報に記載の主鎖に環構造を有する構成単位と側鎖にビフェニル基を有する構成単位とを含む樹脂、特開2020-186373号公報の段落0199~0233に記載の樹脂、特開2020-186325号公報に記載のアルカリ可溶性樹脂、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0078339号公報に記載の式1で表される樹脂、国際公開第2022/030445号に記載のエポキシ基と酸基を含む共重合体を用いることもできる。 Examples of the resin include (meth)acrylic resin, epoxy resin, (meth)acrylamide resin, ene thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, and polyarylene. Examples include ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, and siloxane resin. In addition, the resins include the resin described in the examples of International Publication No. 2016/088645, the resin described in JP 2017-057265, the resin described in JP 2017-032685, and the resin described in JP 2017-032685. The resin described in JP 2017-075248, the resin described in JP 2017-066240, the resin described in JP 2017-167513, the resin described in JP 2017-173787, Resins described in paragraph numbers 0041 to 0060 of JP 2017-206689, resins described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0071 of JP 2018-010856, and blocks described in JP 2016-222891. Polyisocyanate resin, resin described in JP 2020-122052, resin described in JP 2020-111656, resin described in JP 2020-139021, JP 2017-138503 Resin containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain described in JP-A-2020-186373, resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP-A No. 2020-186325 Alkali-soluble resins described in the publication, resins represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0078339, copolymers containing epoxy groups and acid groups described in International Publication No. 2022/030445 You can also use

 樹脂としては、酸基を有する樹脂を用いることが好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。 As the resin, it is preferable to use a resin having acid groups. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.

 酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、40mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上が特に好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、300mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましい。酸基を有する樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5000~100000が好ましく、5000~50000がより好ましい。また、酸基を有する樹脂の数平均分子量(Mn)は、1000~20000が好ましい。 The acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is more preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more, particularly preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, even more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 5,000 to 50,000. Further, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 1,000 to 20,000.

 酸基を有する樹脂は、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を樹脂の全繰り返し単位中5~70モル%含むことがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の上限は、50モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の下限は、10モル%以上であることが好ましく、20モル%以上であることがより好ましい。 The resin having an acid group preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group in its side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol% of repeating units having an acid group in its side chain based on the total repeating units of the resin. The upper limit of the content of repeating units having acid groups in their side chains is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit of the content of repeating units having acid groups in their side chains is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more.

 酸基を有する樹脂については、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0558~0571(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の段落番号0685~0700)の記載、特開2012-198408号公報の段落番号0076~0099の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、酸基を有する樹脂は市販品を用いることもできる。また、樹脂への酸基の導入方法としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、特許第6349629号公報に記載の方法が挙げられる。更に、樹脂への酸基の導入方法としては、エポキシ基の開環反応で生じたヒドロキシ基に酸無水物を反応させて酸基を導入する方法も挙げられる。 Regarding resins having acid groups, the descriptions in paragraph numbers 0558 to 0571 of JP 2012-208494 (corresponding paragraph numbers 0685 to 0700 of US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099), JP 2012-198408 The descriptions in paragraph numbers 0076 to 0099 of the publication can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated into the present specification. Furthermore, commercially available resins having acid groups can also be used. Furthermore, there are no particular limitations on the method for introducing acid groups into the resin, but examples include the method described in Japanese Patent No. 6,349,629. Furthermore, as a method for introducing acid groups into the resin, there is also a method of reacting an acid anhydride with a hydroxy group generated by a ring-opening reaction of an epoxy group to introduce an acid group.

 本発明の着色組成物は、塩基性基を有する樹脂を含むことも好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有する共重合体であることがより好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と、塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有するブロック共重合体であることが更に好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は分散剤として用いることもできる。塩基性基を有する樹脂のアミン価は、5~300mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、10mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、20mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。上限は、200mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下がより好ましい。 It is also preferable that the colored composition of the present invention contains a resin having a basic group. The resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain, and a resin having a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group. A polymer is more preferable, and a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group is even more preferable. A resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant. The amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.

 塩基性基を有する樹脂の市販品としては、DISPERBYK-161、162、163、164、166、167、168、174、182、183、184、185、2000、2001、2050、2150、2163、2164、BYK-LPN6919(以上、ビックケミー社製)、ソルスパース11200、13240、13650、13940、24000、26000、28000、32000、32500、32550、32600、33000、34750、35100、35200、37500、38500、39000、53095、56000、7100(以上、日本ルーブリゾール社製)、Efka PX 4300、4330、4046、4060、4080(以上、BASF社製)等が挙げられる。また、塩基性基を有する樹脂は、特開2014-219665号公報の段落番号0063~0112に記載されたブロック共重合体(B)、特開2018-156021号公報の段落番号0046~0076に記載されたブロック共重合体A1、特開2019-184763号公報の段落番号0150~0153に記載された塩基性基を有するビニル樹脂を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Commercially available resins having basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (manufactured by BYK Chemie), Solsperse 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 385 00, 39000, 53095, 56000, 7100 (all manufactured by Japan Lubrizol), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (all manufactured by BASF), and the like. In addition, the resin having a basic group is the block copolymer (B) described in paragraph numbers 0063 to 0112 of JP2014-219665A, and the block copolymer (B) described in paragraphs 0046 to 0076 of JP2018-156021A. It is also possible to use block copolymer A1, a vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs 0150 to 0153 of JP-A No. 2019-184763, the contents of which are incorporated herein.

 本発明の着色組成物は、酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とをそれぞれ含むことも好ましい。この態様によれば、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とを併用する場合、塩基性基を有する樹脂の含有量は、酸基を有する樹脂の100質量部に対して20~500質量部であることが好ましく、30~300質量部であることがより好ましく、50~200質量部であることが更に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the colored composition of the present invention contains a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved. When a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group are used together, the content of the resin having a basic group is preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group. The amount is preferably 30 to 300 parts by weight, more preferably 50 to 200 parts by weight.

 樹脂としては、下記式(ED1)で示される化合物及び/又は下記式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)を含むモノマー成分に由来する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を用いることも好ましい。 The resin is derived from a monomer component containing a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as "ether dimer"). It is also preferable to use a resin containing repeating units.

 式(ED1)中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。

 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子又は炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の詳細については、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
In formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.

In formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. For details of formula (ED2), the description in JP-A No. 2010-168539 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.

 エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0317の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As a specific example of the ether dimer, for example, the description in paragraph number 0317 of JP-A-2013-029760 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.

 樹脂としては、式(X)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を用いることも好ましい。

 式中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表し、nは0~15の整数を表す。R21及びR22が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、2又は3であることが特に好ましい。nは0~15の整数を表し、0~5の整数であることが好ましく、0~4の整数であることがより好ましく、0~3の整数であることが更に好ましい。
As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by formula (X).

In the formula, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 15. The alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, even more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly 2 or 3 carbon atoms. preferable. n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.

 式(X)で表される化合物としては、パラクミルフェノールのエチレンオキサイド又はプロピレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、アロニックスM-110(東亞合成(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by formula (X) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate of paracumylphenol. Commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).

 樹脂としては、架橋性基を有する樹脂を用いることも好ましい。架橋性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基及び環状エーテル基が挙げられる。 As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having a crosslinkable group. Examples of the crosslinkable group include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.

 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、スチレン基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基などが挙げられ、エポキシ基が好ましい。エポキシ基は、脂環式エポキシ基であってもよい。なお、脂環式エポキシ基とは、エポキシ環と飽和炭化水素環とが縮合した環状構造を有する1価の官能基のことを意味する。環状エーテル基は、式(e-1)で表される基、及び、式(e-2)で表される基から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、式(e-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。式(e-1)のnが0である場合は、式(e-1)で表される基はエポキシ基であり、nが1である場合は、式(e-1)で表される基はオキセタニル基である。また、式(e-2)で表される基は脂環式エポキシ基である。

 式(e-1)中、RE1は水素原子又はアルキル基を表し、nは0又は1を表し、*は結合手を表す;式(e-2)中、環AE1は脂肪族炭化水素環を表し、*は結合手を表す。
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a styrene group, a (meth)allyl group, and a (meth)acryloyl group. Examples of the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, with an epoxy group being preferred. The epoxy group may be a cycloaliphatic epoxy group. Note that the alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed. The cyclic ether group is preferably at least one selected from a group represented by formula (e-1) and a group represented by formula (e-2); More preferably, it is a group in which When n in formula (e-1) is 0, the group represented by formula (e-1) is an epoxy group, and when n is 1, the group represented by formula (e-1) is The group is an oxetanyl group. Furthermore, the group represented by formula (e-2) is an alicyclic epoxy group.

In formula (e-1), R E1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond; in formula (e-2), ring A E1 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon It represents a ring, and * represents a bond.

 RE1が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい。RE1が表すアルキル基は、直鎖又は分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R E1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group represented by R E1 is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.

 nが0のとき、RE1は水素原子であることが好ましい。nが1のとき、RE1は水素原子又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 When n is 0, R E1 is preferably a hydrogen atom. When n is 1, R E1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.

 ここで、式(e-1)のnが0のとき、式(e-1)は以下の式(e-1a)で表される基である。
Here, when n in formula (e-1) is 0, formula (e-1) is a group represented by the following formula (e-1a).

 式(e-2)の環AE1が表す脂肪族炭化水素環は、単環の脂肪族炭化水素環であってもよく、縮合環の脂肪族炭化水素環であってもよい。また、環AE1が表す脂肪族炭化水素環は、架橋構造を有していてもよい。なかでも、耐湿性に優れた膜を形成しやすい理由から縮合環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが好ましく、架橋構造を有する縮合環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが好ましい。環AE1が表す脂肪族炭化水素環の具体例としては、以下に示す基が挙げられ、式(e-2-3)で表される基及び式(e-2-4)で表される基が好ましい。以下の式中、*は結合手を表す。
The aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by ring A E1 in formula (e-2) may be a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or a condensed aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by ring A E1 may have a crosslinked structure. Among these, a condensed aliphatic hydrocarbon ring is preferred because it facilitates the formation of a membrane with excellent moisture resistance, and a condensed aliphatic hydrocarbon ring having a crosslinked structure is preferred. Specific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ring A E1 include the groups shown below, including the group represented by formula (e-2-3) and the group represented by formula (e-2-4). Groups are preferred. In the following formula, * represents a bond.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂としては、環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を用いることが好ましい。環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
As the resin having a cyclic ether group, it is preferable to use a resin containing a repeating unit having a cyclic ether group. Examples of the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group include a repeating unit represented by formula (A1).

 式(A1)において、Xa1は3価の連結基を表し、La1は単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、Za1は環状エーテル基を表す。 In formula (A1), X a1 represents a trivalent linking group, L a1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z a1 represents a cyclic ether group.

 式(A1)のXa1が表す3価の連結基としては、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基、ノボラック系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基及びノボラック系連結基が好ましく、ポリエーテル系連結基、ノボラック系連結基及びポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基がより好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基が更に好ましい。 The trivalent linking group represented by X a1 in formula (A1) includes a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, and a polyamide linking group. Examples include linking groups, polyether linking groups, polystyrene linking groups, bisphenol linking groups, novolac linking groups, and poly(meth)acrylic linking groups, polyether linking groups, polyester linking groups, bisphenol linking groups, etc. A linking group and a novolak-based linking group are preferred, a polyether-based linking group, a novolak-based linking group, and a poly(meth)acrylic-based linking group are more preferred, and a poly(meth)acrylic-based linking group is even more preferred.

 式(A1)のLa1が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-及びこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状又は分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by L a1 in formula (A1) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH- , -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.

 式(A1)のZa1が表す環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基及びオキセタニル基が挙げられ、エポキシ基であることが好ましい。また、Za1が表す環状エーテル基は、式(e-1)で表される基、又は、式(e-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(e-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 in formula (A1) include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferred. Furthermore, the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 is preferably a group represented by formula (e-1) or a group represented by formula (e-2); More preferably, it is a group in which

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂中における環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1~100モル%であることが好ましい。上限は90モル%以下であることが好ましく、80モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。 The content of repeating units having a cyclic ether group in the resin having a cyclic ether group is preferably 1 to 100 mol% of all repeating units in the resin having a cyclic ether group. The upper limit is preferably 90 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂は、環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位の他に他の繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位としては、酸基を有する繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位B-1ともいう)、酸基が保護基で保護された基を有する繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位B-2ともいう)、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位B-3ともいう)などが挙げられる。 The resin having a cyclic ether group may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group. Other repeating units include a repeating unit having an acid group (hereinafter also referred to as repeating unit B-1) and a repeating unit having a group whose acid group is protected with a protective group (hereinafter also referred to as repeating unit B-2). , a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group (hereinafter also referred to as repeating unit B-3), and the like.

 上記繰り返し単位B-1が有する酸基、及び、上記繰り返し単位B-2における上記保護基で保護されている酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基又はカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the acid group possessed by the repeating unit B-1 and the acid group protected by the protecting group in the repeating unit B-2 include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group. , a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, and more preferably a carboxy group.

 上記繰り返し単位B-2における上記酸基を保護する保護基としては、酸又は塩基の作用により分解して脱離する基が挙げられる。保護基は、式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましく、脱保護しやすいという理由から式(Y3)又は式(Y5)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the protecting group that protects the acid group in the repeating unit B-2 include groups that are decomposed and eliminated by the action of an acid or a base. The protecting group is preferably a group represented by any of formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and is preferably a group represented by formula (Y3) or formula (Y5) because it is easy to deprotect. is more preferable.

 式(Y1):-C(RY1)(RY2)(RY3
 式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(RY4)(RY5)(RY6
 式(Y3):-C(RY7)(RY8)(ORY9
 式(Y4):-C(RY10)(H)(ArY1
 式(Y5):-C(=O)(RY11
Formula (Y1): -C(R Y1 )(R Y2 )(R Y3 )
Formula (Y2): -C(=O)OC(R Y4 )(R Y5 )(R Y6 )
Formula (Y3): -C( RY7 )( RY8 )(OR Y9 )
Formula (Y4): -C(R Y10 )(H)(Ar Y1 )
Formula (Y5): -C (=O) (R Y11 )

 式(Y1)中、RY1~RY3は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY1~RY3のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y2)中、RY4~RY6は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY4~RY6のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y3)中、RY7及びRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、RY7及びRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、RY7又はRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す;
 式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。
In formula (Y1), R Y1 to R Y3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of R Y1 to R Y3 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y2), R Y4 to R Y6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of R Y4 to R Y6 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y3), R Y7 and R Y8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R Y7 and R Y8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R Y9 is an alkyl group. represents a group or an aryl group, and R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group, and R Y10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group;
In formula (Y5), R Y11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.

 式(Y1)のRY1~RY3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状又は分岐状であることが好ましい。式(Y1)において、RY1~RY3の2つが結合して、環を形成してもよい。RY1~RY3の2つが結合して形成される環としては、シクロペンチル基やシクロヘキシル基などの単環のシクロアルキル基、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及び、アダマンチル基などの多環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられ、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基であることが好ましい。また、上記のシクロアルキル基においては、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、又は、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R Y1 to R Y3 in formula (Y1) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. In formula (Y1), two of R Y1 to R Y3 may be combined to form a ring. The ring formed by combining two of R Y1 to R Y3 includes monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl group and cyclohexyl group, norbornyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, tetracyclododecanyl group, and adamantyl group. Examples include polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as groups, and monocyclic cycloalkyl groups having 5 to 6 carbon atoms are preferred. Furthermore, in the above cycloalkyl group, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.

 式(Y2)のRY4~RY6が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状又は分岐状であることが好ましい。式(Y2)のRY4~RY6のうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。式(Y2)において、RY4~RY6の2つが結合して、環を形成していてもよい。形成される環としては、式(Y1)で説明した環が挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R Y4 to R Y6 in formula (Y2) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. At least two of R Y4 to R Y6 in formula (Y2) are preferably methyl groups. In formula (Y2), two of R Y4 to R Y6 may be bonded to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed include the ring described in formula (Y1).

 式(Y3)中、RY7及びRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、RY7及びRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、RY7又はRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成してもよい。
アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。RY7又はRY8と、RY9とが結合して形成される環としては、テトラヒドロフラニル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基等が挙げられる。式(Y3)において、RY7又はRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していることが好ましい。また、RY7及びRY8の一方は水素原子であることが好ましい。
In formula (Y3), R Y7 and R Y8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R Y7 and R Y8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R Y9 is an alkyl group. represents a group or an aryl group, and R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 may be combined to form a ring.
The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12. Examples of the ring formed by bonding R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 include a tetrahydrofuranyl group, a tetrahydropyranyl group, and the like. In formula (Y3), R Y7 or R Y8 and R Y9 are preferably bonded to form a ring. Moreover, it is preferable that one of R Y7 and R Y8 is a hydrogen atom.

 式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、ArY1とRY10とは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。式(Y4)においてRY10は、アルキル基であることが好ましい。 In formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group, R Y10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and Ar Y1 and R Y10 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12. In formula (Y4), R Y10 is preferably an alkyl group.

 式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。 In formula (Y5), R Y11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12.

 保護基の分子量は40~200であることが好ましく、40~150であることがより好ましく、40~120であることが更に好ましい。保護基の分子量が上記範囲であれば保存安定性に優れ、かつ、低温での硬化性に優れた着色組成物とすることができる。 The molecular weight of the protecting group is preferably 40 to 200, more preferably 40 to 150, even more preferably 40 to 120. When the molecular weight of the protecting group is within the above range, a colored composition can be obtained which has excellent storage stability and excellent curability at low temperatures.

 保護基の具体例としては、1-メトキシエチル基、1-エトキシエチル基、1-n-プロポキシエチル基、1-n-ブトキシエチル基、1-t-ブトキシエチル基、1-シクロペンチルオキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基、シクロヘキシル(メトキシ)メチル基、α-メトキシベンジル基、α-エトキシベンジル基、α-n-プロポキシベンジル基、2-フェニル-1-メトキシエチル基、2-フェニル-1-エトキシエチル基、2-フェニル-1-i-プロポキシエチル基、2-テトラヒドロフラニル基、2-テトラヒドロピラニル基が挙げられ、1-エトキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基、2-テトラヒドロフラニル基、2-テトラヒドロピラニル基が好ましく、1-エトキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基がより好ましい。 Specific examples of protecting groups include 1-methoxyethyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-n-propoxyethyl group, 1-n-butoxyethyl group, 1-t-butoxyethyl group, 1-cyclopentyloxyethyl group. , 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group, cyclohexyl(methoxy)methyl group, α-methoxybenzyl group, α-ethoxybenzyl group, α-n-propoxybenzyl group, 2-phenyl-1-methoxyethyl group, 2-phenyl-1 -ethoxyethyl group, 2-phenyl-1-i-propoxyethyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl group, 2-tetrahydropyranyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl group. A 2-tetrahydropyranyl group is preferred, and a 1-ethoxyethyl group and a 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group are more preferred.

 繰り返し単位B-3が有するエチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、スチレン基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group possessed by the repeating unit B-3 include a vinyl group, a styrene group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and the like.

 繰り返し単位B-1としては、下記式(B1)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。また、繰り返し単位B-2としては、下記式(B2)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。また、繰り返し単位B-3としては、下記式(B3)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Examples of the repeating unit B-1 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B1). Furthermore, examples of the repeating unit B-2 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B2). Further, examples of the repeating unit B-3 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B3).

 式(B1)において、Xb1は3価の連結基を表し、Lb1は単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、Zb1は酸基を表す。
 式(B2)において、Xb2は3価の連結基を表し、Lb2は単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、Zb2は酸基が保護基で保護された基を表す。
 式(B3)において、Xb3は3価の連結基を表し、Lb3は単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、Zb3はエチレン性不飽和結合含有基を表す。
In formula (B1), X b1 represents a trivalent linking group, L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b1 represents an acid group.
In formula (B2), X b2 represents a trivalent linking group, L b2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b2 represents a group whose acid group is protected with a protecting group.
In formula (B3), X b3 represents a trivalent linking group, L b3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b3 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.

 式(B1)のXb1が表す3価の連結基、式(B2)のXb2が表す3価の連結基及び式(B3)のXb3が表す3価の連結基としては、特に限定はない。例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基、ノボラック系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基及びノボラック系連結基が好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基がより好ましい。 The trivalent linking group represented by X b1 in formula (B1), the trivalent linking group represented by X b2 in formula (B2), and the trivalent linking group represented by X b3 in formula (B3) are not particularly limited. do not have. For example, poly(meth)acrylic linking group, polyalkyleneimine linking group, polyester linking group, polyurethane linking group, polyurea linking group, polyamide linking group, polyether linking group, polystyrene linking group, bisphenol. Examples include poly(meth)acrylic linking groups, novolac linking groups, poly(meth)acrylic linking groups, polyether linking groups, polyester linking groups, bisphenol linking groups, and novolak linking groups. A system linking group is more preferred.

 式(B1)のLb1が表す2価の連結基、式(B2)のLb2が表す2価の連結基及び式(B3)のLb3が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-及びこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状又は分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by L b1 in formula (B1), the divalent linking group represented by L b2 in formula (B2), and the divalent linking group represented by L b3 in formula (B3) include an alkylene group ( (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO -, -OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these are exemplified. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.

 式(B1)のZb1が表す酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基又はカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 The acid group represented by Z b1 in formula (B1) includes a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group, preferably a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, and a carboxy group. is more preferable.

 式(B2)のZb2が表す酸基が保護基で保護された基としては、酸基が上述した式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基で保護された基が挙げられる、酸基が式(Y3)又は式(Y5)で表される基で保護された基であることが好ましい。上記酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基又はカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the group in which the acid group represented by Z b2 in formula (B2) is protected with a protecting group include groups in which the acid group is protected with a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5). The acid group represented by formula (Y3) or formula (Y5) is preferably a group protected by a group represented by formula (Y3) or formula (Y5). Examples of the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphoric acid group, preferably a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group, and more preferably a carboxy group.

 式(B3)のZb3が表すエチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、スチレン基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group represented by Z b3 in formula (B3) include a vinyl group, a styrene group, a (meth)allyl group, and a (meth)acryloyl group.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂が繰り返し単位B-1を含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂中における単位B-1の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂の全繰り返し単位中5~85モル%であることが好ましい。上限は60モル%以下であることが好ましく、40モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、8モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。 When the resin having a cyclic ether group contains a repeating unit B-1, the content of the unit B-1 in the resin having a cyclic ether group is 5 to 85 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable that there be. The upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 40 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂が繰り返し単位B-2を含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂中における単位B-2の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。 When the resin having a cyclic ether group contains a repeating unit B-2, the content of the unit B-2 in the resin having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable that there be. The upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂が繰り返し単位B-1と繰り返し単位B-2のそれぞれを含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂は、繰り返し単位B-1の1モルに対して繰り返し単位B-2を0.4~3.2モル含むことが好ましく、0.8~2.8モル含むことがより好ましく、1.2~2.4モル含むことが更に好ましい。 When the resin having a cyclic ether group contains each of repeating unit B-1 and repeating unit B-2, the resin having a cyclic ether group contains 0 repeating unit B-2 per mole of repeating unit B-1. The content is preferably 0.4 to 3.2 moles, more preferably 0.8 to 2.8 moles, and even more preferably 1.2 to 2.4 moles.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂が繰り返し単位B-3を含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂中における単位B-3の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。 When the resin having a cyclic ether group contains a repeating unit B-3, the content of the unit B-3 in the resin having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable that there be. The upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂は、更に芳香族炭化水素環を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環としては、ベンゼン環又はナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環であることが好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基を有する樹脂が、芳香族炭化水素環を有す繰り返し単位を含む場合、芳香族炭化水素環を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂の全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環を有す繰り返し単位としては、ビニルトルエン、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートなどの芳香族炭化水素環を有する単官能の重合性化合物由来の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 It is preferable that the resin having a cyclic ether group further contains a repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and preferably a benzene ring. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group. When the resin having a cyclic ether group contains a repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring, the content of the repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring is 1 to 65% of the total repeating units of the resin having a cyclic ether group. Preferably it is mol%. The upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more. Examples of the repeating unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring include repeating units derived from monofunctional polymerizable compounds having an aromatic hydrocarbon ring such as vinyltoluene and benzyl (meth)acrylate.

 環状エーテル基を有する樹脂の市販品としては、例えば、ナフタレン変性エポキシ樹脂として、EPICLON HP5000、EPICLON HP4032D(以上、DIC(株)製)などが挙げられる。アルキルジフェノール型エポキシ樹脂として、EPICLON 820(DIC(株)製)などが挙げられる。ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂として、jER825、jER827、jER828、jER834、jER1001、jER1002、jER1003、jER1055、jER1007、jER1009、jER1010(以上、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、EPICLON860、EPICLON1050、EPICLON1051、EPICLON1055(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂として、jER806、jER807、jER4004、jER4005、jER4007、jER4010(以上、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、EPICLON830、EPICLON835(以上、DIC(株)製)、LCE-21、RE-602S(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、jER152、jER154、jER157S70、jER157S65(以上、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-770、EPICLON N-775(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、EPICLON N-660、EPICLON N-665、EPICLON N-670、EPICLON N-673、EPICLON N-680、EPICLON N-690、EPICLON N-695(以上、DIC(株)製)、EOCN-1020(日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。脂肪族エポキシ樹脂として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S、同EP-4085S、同EP-4088S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、セロキサイド2021P、セロキサイド2081、セロキサイド2083、セロキサイド2085、EHPE3150、EPOLEAD PB 3600、EPOLEAD PB 4700(以上、(株)ダイセル製)、デナコール EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L(以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製)等が挙げられる。また、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂としては、特開2013-011869号公報の段落番号0034~0036に記載された樹脂、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0147~0156に記載された樹脂、特開2014-089408号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載された樹脂、特開2017-179172号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2018-180081号公報の段落番号0027~0055、0096に記載された樹脂、特表2020-515680号公報の段落番号0117~0120に記載された樹脂、国際公開第2020/175011号の段落番号0084に記載された樹脂を用いることもできる。 Examples of commercially available resins having a cyclic ether group include EPICLON HP5000 and EPICLON HP4032D (manufactured by DIC Corporation) as naphthalene-modified epoxy resins. Examples of the alkyl diphenol type epoxy resin include EPICLON 820 (manufactured by DIC Corporation). As bisphenol A epoxy resins, jER825, jER827, jER828, jER834, jER1001, jER1002, jER1003, jER1055, jER1007, jER1009, jER1010 (the above, Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050, EPICLON1051, EPICLON1055 (manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.), etc. Bisphenol F type epoxy resins include jER806, jER807, jER4004, jER4005, jER4007, jER4010 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON830, EPICLON835 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE -602S( The above examples include those manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.). Examples of phenol novolac type epoxy resins include jER152, jER154, jER157S70, jER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, and EPICLON N-775 (manufactured by DIC Corporation). ) etc. Can be mentioned. As cresol novolak type epoxy resin, EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (The above are manufactured by DIC Corporation) , EOCN-1020 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.). As aliphatic epoxy resins, ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.), Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, EPOLEAD Examples include PB 4700 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, and EX-850L (manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation). Furthermore, examples of resins having a cyclic ether group include resins described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0036 of JP-A No. 2013-011869, resins described in paragraph numbers 0147 to 0156 of JP-A-2014-043556, and Resins described in paragraph numbers 0085 to 0092 of JP 2014-089408, resins described in JP 2017-179172, and paragraphs 0027 to 0055, 0096 of JP 2018-180081. Resins described in paragraph numbers 0117 to 0120 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-515680 and resins described in paragraph number 0084 of International Publication No. 2020/175011 can also be used.

 樹脂としては、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂(以下、樹脂Acともいう)を用いることも好ましい。樹脂Acにおいて、芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていてもよく、繰り返し単位の側鎖に含まれていてもよい。芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていることが好ましい。なお、本明細書において、芳香族カルボキシ基とは、芳香族環にカルボキシ基が1個以上結合した構造の基のことである。芳香族カルボキシ基において、芳香族環に結合したカルボキシ基の数は、1~4個であることが好ましく、1~2個であることがより好ましい。 As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having an aromatic carboxy group (hereinafter also referred to as resin Ac). In the resin Ac, the aromatic carboxy group may be included in the main chain of the repeating unit, or may be included in the side chain of the repeating unit. The aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit. In addition, in this specification, an aromatic carboxy group refers to a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring. In the aromatic carboxy group, the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 to 2.

 樹脂Acは、式(Ac-1)で表される繰り返し単位及び式(Ac-2)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましい。

 式(Ac-1)中、Arは芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基を表し、Lは、-COO-又はCONH-を表し、Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 式(Ac-2)中、Ar10は芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基を表し、L11は、-COO-又はCONH-を表し、L12は3価の連結基を表し、P10はポリマー鎖を表す。
The resin Ac is preferably a resin containing at least one type of repeating unit selected from a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-1) and a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-2).

In formula (Ac-1), Ar 1 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxy group, L 1 represents -COO- or CONH-, and L 2 represents a divalent linking group.
In formula (Ac-2), Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxy group, L 11 represents -COO- or CONH-, L 12 represents a trivalent linking group, and P 10 represents a polymer chain. represents.

 式(Ac-1)においてArが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基としては、芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造、芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造などが挙げられる。芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物及び芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物としては、下記構造の化合物が挙げられる。
Examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1) include a structure derived from an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride, a structure derived from an aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride, and the like. Examples of the aromatic tricarboxylic anhydride and aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydride include compounds having the following structures.

 上記式中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、下記式(Q-1)で表される基又は下記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
In the above formula, Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, represented by the following formula (Q-1). or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).

 Arが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基は、架橋性基を有していてもよい。架橋性基は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基及び環状エーテル基であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基であることがより好ましい。Arが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基の具体例としては、式(Ar-11)で表される基、式(Ar-12)で表される基、式(Ar-13)で表される基などが挙げられる。
The aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 1 may have a crosslinkable group. The crosslinkable group is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group, and more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13). Examples include groups such as

 式(Ar-11)中、n1は1~4の整数を表し、1又は2であることが好ましく、2であることがより好ましい。
 式(Ar-12)中、n2は1~8の整数を表し、1~4の整数であることが好ましく、1又は2であることがより好ましく、2であることが更に好ましい。
 式(Ar-13)中、n3及びn4はそれぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、0~2の整数であることが好ましく、1又は2であることがより好ましく、1であることが更に好ましい。ただし、n3及びn4の少なくとも一方は1以上の整数である。
 式(Ar-13)中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、上記式(Q-1)で表される基又は上記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
 式(Ar-11)~(Ar-13)中、*1はLとの結合位置を表す。
In formula (Ar-11), n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-12), n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-13), n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, and preferably 1. More preferred. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (Ar-13), Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, the above formula (Q- Represents a group represented by 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
In formulas (Ar-11) to (Ar-13), *1 represents the bonding position with L 1 .

 式(Ac-1)においてLは、-COO-又はCONH-を表し、-COO-を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (Ac-1), L 1 represents -COO- or CONH-, preferably -COO-.

 式(Ac-1)においてLが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-及びこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。アルキレン基及びアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。Lが表す2価の連結基は、-L2a-O-で表される基であることが好ましい。L2aは、アルキレン基;アリーレン基;アルキレン基とアリーレン基とを組み合わせた基;アルキレン基及びアリーレン基から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-及びS-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、アルキレン基であることが好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキレン基及びアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (Ac-1) includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and these. Examples include groups combining two or more of the following. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 10. The alkylene group and arylene group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group. The divalent linking group represented by L 2 is preferably a group represented by -L 2a -O-. L 2a is an alkylene group; an arylene group; a group combining an alkylene group and an arylene group; at least one selected from an alkylene group and an arylene group, and -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, Examples include a group combining at least one selected from -NH- and S-, and an alkylene group is preferred. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkylene group and arylene group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group.

 式(Ac-2)においてAr10が表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基としては、式(Ac-1)のArと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 The aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) has the same meaning as Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1), and the preferred range is also the same.

 式(Ac-2)においてL11は、-COO-又はCONH-を表し、-COO-を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (Ac-2), L 11 represents -COO- or CONH-, preferably -COO-.

 式(Ac-2)においてL12が表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-及びこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。L12が表す3価の連結基は、式(L12-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(L12-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
In formula (Ac-2), the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 includes a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and these two groups. Examples include groups that combine more than one species. Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20, and even more preferably 1 to 15. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).

 式(L12-1)中、L12bは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12bが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-及びS-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基又は炭化水素基と-O-とを組み合わせた基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-1), L 12b represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2), and *2 represents formula ( It represents the bonding position of Ac-2) with P10 . The trivalent linking group represented by L 12b includes a hydrocarbon group; a hydrocarbon group, and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and S-; Examples include a group in which a hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group and an -O- are combined.

 式(L12-2)中、L12cは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12cが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-及びS-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-2), L 12c represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2), and *2 represents the bonding position of formula (Ac-2). It represents the bonding position of Ac-2) with P10 . The trivalent linking group represented by L 12c is a hydrocarbon group; a hydrocarbon group, and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and S-; A hydrocarbon group is preferable.

 式(Ac-2)においてP10はポリマー鎖を表す。P10が表すポリマー鎖は、ポリ(メタ)アクリル繰り返し単位、ポリエーテル繰り返し単位、ポリエステル繰り返し単位及びポリオール繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。ポリマー鎖P10の重量平均分子量は500~20000が好ましい。下限は1000以上が好ましい。上限は10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましい。P10の重量平均分子量が上記範囲であれば組成物中における顔料の分散性が良好である。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂が式(Ac-2)で表される繰り返し単位を有する樹脂である場合は、この樹脂は分散剤として好ましく用いられる。 In formula (Ac-2), P 10 represents a polymer chain. The polymer chain represented by P 10 preferably has at least one type of repeating unit selected from poly(meth)acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units, and polyol repeating units. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P 10 is preferably 500 to 20,000. The lower limit is preferably 1000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of P 10 is within the above range, the pigment will have good dispersibility in the composition. When the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group is a resin having a repeating unit represented by formula (Ac-2), this resin is preferably used as a dispersant.

 P10が表すポリマー鎖は、架橋性基を含んでいてもよい。架橋性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基及び環状エーテル基が挙げられる。 The polymer chain represented by P 10 may contain a crosslinkable group. Examples of the crosslinkable group include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups and cyclic ether groups.

 本発明の着色組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含有することが好ましい。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上である樹脂が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant. Examples of the dispersant include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins). Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) refers to a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups. The acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol % or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %. The acid group that the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) has is preferably a carboxy group. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH/g. Moreover, the basic dispersant (basic resin) refers to a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups. The basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%. The basic group that the basic dispersant has is preferably an amino group.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。グラフト樹脂の詳細については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as a dispersant is a graft resin. For details of the graft resin, the descriptions in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A No. 2012-255128 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むポリイミン系分散剤であることも好ましい。ポリイミン系分散剤としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造を有する主鎖と、原子数40~10000の側鎖とを有し、かつ主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に塩基性窒素原子を有する樹脂が好ましい。塩基性窒素原子は、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はない。ポリイミン系分散剤については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as a dispersant is a polyimine-based dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain. The polyimine dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less, a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain. Preferably, the resin has The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it exhibits basicity. Regarding the polyimine dispersant, the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂としては、例えば、デンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant has a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion. Examples of such resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers). Further, specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraph numbers 0196 to 0209 of JP-A No. 2013-043962.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上であることが好ましく、10~80モル%であることがより好ましく、20~70モル%であることが更に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the resin used as a dispersant is a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain. The content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and more preferably 20 to 70 mol% of the total repeating units of the resin. More preferably, it is mol%.

 分散剤として、特開2018-087939号公報に記載された樹脂、特許第6432077号公報の段落番号0219~0221に記載されたブロック共重合体(EB-1)~(EB-9)、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載のポリエステル側鎖を有するポリエチレンイミン、国際公開第2019/125940号に記載のブロック共重合体、特開2020-066687号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、特開2020-066688号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載の分散剤などを用いることもできる。 As a dispersant, resins described in JP 2018-087939, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraph numbers 0219 to 0221 of Patent No. 6432077, and international publication Polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in No. 2016/104803, block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP 2020-066687, A block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A No. 2020-066688, a dispersant described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, etc. can also be used.

 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、ビックケミー社製のDisperbykシリーズ(例えば、Disperbyk-111、161、2001など)、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製のソルスパースシリーズ(例えば、ソルスパース20000、76500など)、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。 Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples include the Disperbyk series manufactured by Byk Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 161, 2001, etc.), Solsperse manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. series (for example, Solsperse 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajisperse series manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno, Inc., and the like. Further, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP 2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP 2017-194662A can also be used as a dispersant.

 着色組成物の全固形分中における樹脂の含有量は1~50質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。樹脂を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 50% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more. The colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types of resin. When two or more types of resin are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、後述する重合開始剤、及び、重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。
 重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。本発明で用いられる重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であることが好ましい。
<<Polymerizable compound>>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
Moreover, it is preferable that the coloring composition of this invention contains the polymerization initiator and polymeric compound mentioned later.
Examples of the polymerizable compound include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and the like. The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.

 重合性化合物としては、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマーなどの化学的形態のいずれであってもよいが、モノマーが好ましい。重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましい。上限は、2000以下が好ましく、1500以下がより好ましい。下限は、150以上が好ましく、250以上がより好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, prepolymer, or oligomer, but monomers are preferred. The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3,000. The upper limit is preferably 2000 or less, more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 or more, more preferably 250 or more.

 重合性化合物のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価(以下、C=C価という)は、着色組成物の経時安定性の観点から2~14mmol/gであることが好ましい。下限は、3mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、4mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、5mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は12mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以下であることがより好ましく、8mmol/g以下であることが更に好ましい。重合性化合物のC=C価は、重合性化合物の1分子中に含まれるエチレン性不飽和結合含有基の数を重合性化合物の分子量で割ることで算出した値である。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value (hereinafter referred to as C═C value) of the polymerizable compound is preferably 2 to 14 mmol/g from the viewpoint of stability of the coloring composition over time. The lower limit is preferably 3 mmol/g or more, more preferably 4 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 5 mmol/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 12 mmol/g or less, more preferably 10 mmol/g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol/g or less. The C═C value of a polymerizable compound is a value calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable compound by the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound.

 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3個以上含む化合物であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を4個以上含む化合物であることがより好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基の上限は、着色組成物の経時安定性の観点から15個以下であることが好ましく、10個以下であることがより好ましく、6個以下であることが更に好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましく、3~10官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが更に好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing three or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and more preferably a compound containing four or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. The upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and even more preferably 6 or less from the viewpoint of the stability of the coloring composition over time. Further, the polymerizable compound is preferably a trifunctional or higher functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a trifunctional to 15 functional (meth)acrylate compound, and a trifunctional to 10 functional (meth)acrylate compound. More preferably, it is a tri- to hexa-functional (meth)acrylate compound.

 重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート及びこれらの化合物の変性体などが挙げられる。変性体としては、エトキシ化ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートなど、上記の化合物の(メタ)アクリロイル基がアルキレンオキシ基を介して結合している構造の化合物などが挙げられる。具体例としては、式(Z-4)で表される化合物、式(Z-5)で表される化合物などが挙げられる。 Examples of polymerizable compounds include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, and modified products of these compounds. Can be mentioned. Examples of the modified product include compounds having a structure in which the (meth)acryloyl groups of the above compounds are bonded via an alkyleneoxy group, such as ethoxylated dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate. Specific examples include compounds represented by formula (Z-4) and compounds represented by formula (Z-5).

 式(Z-4)及び(Z-5)中、Eは、各々独立に、-((CHCHO)-、又は-((CHCH(CH)O)-を表し、yは、各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、Xは、各々独立に、(メタ)アクリロイル基、水素原子、又はカルボキシ基を表す。式(Z-4)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は3個又は4個であり、mは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各mの合計は0~40の整数である。式(Z-5)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は5個又は6個であり、nは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各nの合計は0~60の整数である。 In formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5), E is each independently -((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O)-, or -((CH 2 ) y CH(CH 3 )O)- , each y independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and each X independently represents a (meth)acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxy group. In formula (Z-4), the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 3 or 4, each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40. In formula (Z-5), the total number of (meth)acryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60.

 式(Z-4)中、mは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。また、各mの合計は、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~16の整数がより好ましく、4~8の整数が特に好ましい。
 式(Z-5)中、nは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。また、各nの合計は、3~60の整数が好ましく、3~24の整数がより好ましく、6~12の整数が特に好ましい。
 また、式(Z-4)又は式(Z-5)中のE、すなわち-((CHCHO)-又は-((CHCH(CH)O)-は、酸素原子側の末端がXに結合する形態が好ましい。
In formula (Z-4), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4. Further, the sum of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In formula (Z-5), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4. Further, the sum of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
In addition, E in formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5), that is, -((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O)- or -((CH 2 ) y CH(CH 3 )O)-, A form in which the terminal on the oxygen atom side is bonded to X is preferable.

 また、重合性化合物としては下記式(Z-6)に示すようなポリペンタエリスリトールポリ(メタ)アクリレートを使用することもできる。

 式(Z-6)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立して水素原子又は(メタ)アクリロイル基を表し、nは1~10の整数を表す。ただし、X~Xの少なくとも一つは(メタ)アクリロイル基である。
Further, as the polymerizable compound, polypentaerythritol poly(meth)acrylate as shown in the following formula (Z-6) can also be used.

In formula (Z-6), X 1 to X 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a (meth)acryloyl group, and n represents an integer of 1 to 10. However, at least one of X 1 to X 6 is a (meth)acryloyl group.

 本発明で用いられる重合性化合物は、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリペンタエリスリトールポリ(メタ)アクリレート及びこれらの変性体からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種であることが好ましい。市販品としては、KAYARAD D-310、DPHA、DPEA-12(以上、日本化薬(株)製)、NKエステルA-DPH-12E、TPOA-50(新中村化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is at least one selected from the group consisting of dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate, polypentaerythritol poly(meth)acrylate, and modified products thereof. Preferably it is a seed. Commercially available products include KAYARAD D-310, DPHA, DPEA-12 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), NK Ester A-DPH-12E, and TPOA-50 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Can be mentioned.

 また、重合性化合物としては、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはM-460;東亞合成製)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、NKエステルA-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、NKオリゴUA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)、EBECRYL80(ダイセル・オルネクス社製、アミン含有4官能アクリレート)などを用いることもできる。 In addition, as polymerizable compounds, diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth)acrylate (commercially available product is M-460; manufactured by Toagosei), pentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), NK ester A-TMMT), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA), RP-1040 (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (Toagosei Co., Ltd.) ), NK Oligo UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), Light Acrylate POB-A0 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), EBECRYL80 (manufactured by Daicel Allnex, amine-containing tetrafunctional acrylate), etc. can also be used.

 また、重合性化合物としては、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンプロピレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸エチレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートなどの3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物を用いることも好ましい。3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-309、M-310、M-321、M-350、M-360、M-313、M-315、M-306、M-305、M-303、M-452、M-450(東亞合成(株)製)、NKエステル A9300、A-GLY-9E、A-GLY-20E、A-TMM-3、A-TMM-3L、A-TMM-3LM-N、A-TMPT、TMPT(新中村化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD GPO-303、TMPTA、THE-330、TPA-330、PET-30(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 In addition, as polymerizable compounds, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropanepropylene oxide modified tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide modified tri(meth)acrylate, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide modified tri(meth)acrylate, It is also preferable to use trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate. Commercially available trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306, M-305. , M-303, M-452, M-450 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK ester A9300, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A -TMM-3LM-N, A-TMPT, TMPT (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD GPO-303, TMPTA, THE-330, TPA-330, PET-30 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Examples include.

 また、重合性化合物としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基等の酸基を有する化合物を用いることもできる。このような化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-305、M-510、M-520、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Further, as the polymerizable compound, a compound having an acid group such as a carboxy group, a sulfo group, or a phosphoric acid group can also be used. Commercially available products of such compounds include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520, Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and the like.

 また、重合性化合物としては、カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物については、特開2013-253224号公報の段落0042~0045の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されている、DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120等が挙げられる。 Further, as the polymerizable compound, a compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used. Regarding the compound having a caprolactone structure, the description in paragraphs 0042 to 0045 of JP-A No. 2013-253224 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Examples of compounds having a caprolactone structure include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120, which are commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series.

 また、重合性化合物としては、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。市販品としては、オグソールEA-0200、EA-0300(大阪ガスケミカル(株)製、フルオレン骨格を有する(メタ)アクリレートモノマー)などが挙げられる。 Furthermore, as the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used. Commercially available products include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).

 また、重合性化合物としては、トルエンなどの環境規制物質を実質的に含まない化合物を用いることも好ましい。このような化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD DPHA LT、KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Furthermore, as the polymerizable compound, it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain environmentally controlled substances such as toluene. Commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT, KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), and the like.

 また、重合性化合物としては、特公昭48-041708号公報、特開昭51-037193号公報、特公平02-032293号公報、特公平02-016765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-049860号公報、特公昭56-017654号公報、特公昭62-039417号公報、特公昭62-039418号公報に記載されたエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物も好適である。また、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平01-105238号公報に記載された分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する重合性化合物を用いることも好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、UA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、LINC-202UA(共栄社化学(株)製)などの市販品を用いることもできる。 In addition, as polymerizable compounds, urethane acrylates such as those described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-032293, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 02-016765 are used. Also suitable are urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418. It is also preferable to use polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-01-105238. In addition, the polymerizable compounds include UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, Commercially available products such as T-600, AI-600, LINC-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.

 着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量は、1~35質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、25質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合性化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 35% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more. The colored composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more kinds of polymerizable compounds. When two or more types of polymerizable compounds are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof falls within the above range.

<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は光重合開始剤を含有することができる。本発明の着色組成物が重合性化合物を含む場合、本発明の着色組成物は更に光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<<Photopolymerization initiator>>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain a photopolymerization initiator. When the colored composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound, it is preferable that the colored composition of the present invention further contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet to visible range are preferred. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a radical photopolymerization initiator.

 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物などが挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物及び3-アリール置換クマリン化合物であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる化合物であることがより好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111に記載された化合物、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤、特開2020-055992号公報に記載のオキサゾリジン基を有するアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特開2013-190459号公報に記載のオキシム系光重合開始剤、特開2020-172619号公報に記載の重合体、国際公開第2020/152120号に記載の式1で表される化合物、特開2021-181406号公報に記載の化合物、特開 2022-013379号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2022-015747号公報に記載の式(1)で表される化合物、特表2021-507058号公報に記載のフッ素含有フルオレンオキシムエステル系光開始剤などが挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds with a triazine skeleton, compounds with an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, and the like. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyl dimethyl ketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, and hexaarylbylene compounds. Preferred are imidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, α-hydroxyketones The compound is more preferably a compound selected from a compound, an α-aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and even more preferably an oxime compound. In addition, as photopolymerization initiators, compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37 to 60p, vol. 19, No. 3,2019, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/221177, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/110179, JP 2019-043864 The photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A No. 2019-044030, the peroxide-based initiator described in JP-A No. 2019-167313, the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A No. 2020-055992 The aminoacetophenone initiator having an oxazolidine group as described, the oxime photopolymerization initiator described in JP 2013-190459, the polymer described in JP 2020-172619, the WO 2020/152120 A compound represented by formula 1 described in JP-A No. 2021-181406, a photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A No. 2022-013379, a compound represented by formula (1) described in JP-A No. 2022-015747 ), the fluorine-containing fluorene oxime ester photoinitiator described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-507058, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.

 ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物の具体例としては、2,2’,4-トリス(2-クロロフェニル)-5-(3,4-ジメトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニル-1,1’-ビイミダゾールなどが挙げられる。 Specific examples of hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2',4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1'-biimidazole, etc. can be mentioned.

 α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184、Irgacure 1173、Irgacure 2959、Irgacure 127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 907、Irgacure 369、Irgacure 369E、Irgacure 379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 819、Omnirad TPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819、Irgacure TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, and Irgacure 117. 3, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (all BASF (manufactured by a company). Commercially available α-aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, and Irgacure 36. 9, Irgacure 369E, Irgacure 379EG (all manufactured by BASF) (manufactured by). Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819, Irgacure TPO (manufactured by BASF), and the like.

 オキシム化合物としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0142に記載の化合物、特許第5430746号に記載の化合物、特許第5647738号に記載の化合物、特開2021-173858号公報の一般式(1)で表される化合物や段落0022から0024に記載の化合物、特開2021-170089号公報の一般式(1)で表される化合物や段落0117から0120に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロヘキシル-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-アセチルオキシム)などが挙げられる。市販品としては、Irgacure OXE01、Irgacure OXE02、Irgacure OXE03、Irgacure OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-301、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-327(TRONLY社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds include the compound described in paragraph 0142 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the compound described in Patent No. 5430746, the compound described in Patent No. 5647738, and the general formula (1 ) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024, and the compounds represented by the general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0117 to 0120 of JP-A-2021-170089. Specific examples of oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino -1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime), and the like. Commercially available products include Irgacure OXE01, Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, Irgacure OXE04 (manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-301, TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-327 (manufactured by TRONLY). ), Adeka Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd., photopolymerization initiator 2) described in JP-A-2012-014052 can be mentioned. Further, as the oxime compound, it is also preferable to use a compound without coloring property or a compound with high transparency and resistance to discoloration. Commercially available products include ADEKA Arkles NCI-730, NCI-831, and NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.).

 光重合開始剤としては、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0143~0149に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of photopolymerization initiators include oxime compounds having a fluorene ring, oxime compounds having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring, oxime compounds having a fluorine atom, oxime compounds having a nitro group, and benzofuran skeleton. Examples include oxime compounds having a carbazole skeleton with a substituent having a hydroxy group bonded to the carbazole skeleton, and compounds described in paragraphs 0143 to 0149 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.

 オキシム化合物OXは、式(OX1)で表される化合物及び式(OX2)で表される化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、式(OX2)で表される化合物であることがより好ましい。

 式中、RX1は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロ環基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、ホスフィノイル基、カルバモイル基又はスルファモイル基を表し、
 RX2は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロ環基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アルキルスルファニル基、アリールスルファニル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシルオキシ基又はアミノ基を表し、
 RX3~RX14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子又は置換基を表す;
 ただし、RX10~RX14のうち少なくとも一つは、電子求引性基である。
The oxime compound OX is preferably at least one selected from a compound represented by formula (OX1) and a compound represented by formula (OX2), and more preferably a compound represented by formula (OX2). preferable.

In the formula, R group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, acyloxy group, amino group, phosphinoyl group, carbamoyl group or sulfamoyl group,
R Represents a sulfonyl group, acyloxy group or amino group,
R X3 to R X14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent;
However, at least one of R X10 to R X14 is an electron-withdrawing group.

 電子求引性基としては、アシル基、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、シアノ基が挙げられ、アシル基及びニトロ基が好ましく、耐光性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由からアシル基であることがより好ましく、ベンゾイル基であることが更に好ましい。 Examples of electron-withdrawing groups include acyl groups, nitro groups, trifluoromethyl groups, alkylsulfinyl groups, arylsulfinyl groups, alkylsulfonyl groups, arylsulfonyl groups, and cyano groups, with acyl groups and nitro groups being preferred; An acyl group is more preferable, and a benzoyl group is even more preferable because it facilitates the formation of a film with excellent properties.

 上記式において、RX12が電子求引性基であり、RX10、RX11、RX13、RX14は水素原子であることが好ましい。 In the above formula, R X12 is preferably an electron-withdrawing group, and R X10 , R X11 , R X13 , and R X14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.

 オキシム化合物OXの具体例としては、特許第4600600号公報の段落番号0083~0105に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the oxime compound OX include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0083 to 0105 of Japanese Patent No. 4,600,600.

 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.


 オキシム化合物は、波長350~500nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物が好ましく、波長360~480nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物がより好ましい。また、オキシム化合物の波長365nm又は波長405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、高いことが好ましく、1000~300000であることがより好ましく、2000~300000であることが更に好ましく、5000~200000であることが特に好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。例えば、分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm. In addition, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or 405 nm is preferably high, more preferably from 1000 to 300,000, even more preferably from 2000 to 300,000, and even more preferably from 5000 to 200,000. It is particularly preferable that there be. The molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using a known method. For example, it is preferable to measure with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent at a concentration of 0.01 g/L.

 光重合開始剤としては、Irgacure OXE01(BASF社製)及び/又はIrgacure OXE02(BASF社製)と、Omnirad 2959(IGM Resins B.V.社製)とを組み合わせて用いることも好ましい。 As the photopolymerization initiator, it is also preferable to use a combination of Irgacure OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and/or Irgacure OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) and Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).

 光重合開始剤としては、2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いてもよい。そのような光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることにより、光ラジカル重合開始剤の1分子から2つ以上のラジカルが発生するため、良好な感度が得られる。また、非対称構造の化合物を用いた場合においては、結晶性が低下して溶剤などへの溶解性が向上して、経時で析出しにくくなり、着色樹脂組成物の経時安定性を向上させることができる。2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤の具体例としては、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2011-524436号公報、国際公開第2015/004565号、特表2016-532675号公報の段落番号0407~0412、国際公開第2017/033680号の段落番号0039~0055に記載されているオキシム化合物の2量体、特表2013-522445号公報に記載されている化合物(E)及び化合物(G)、国際公開第2016/034963号に記載されているCmpd1~7、特表2017-523465号公報の段落番号0007に記載されているオキシムエステル類光開始剤、特開2017-167399号公報の段落番号0020~0033に記載されている光開始剤、特開2017-151342号公報の段落番号0017~0026に記載されている光重合開始剤(A)、特許第6469669号公報に記載されているオキシムエステル光開始剤などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, a difunctional, trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used. By using such a radical photopolymerization initiator, two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so that good sensitivity can be obtained. In addition, when a compound with an asymmetric structure is used, the crystallinity decreases and the solubility in solvents improves, making it difficult to precipitate over time, thereby improving the stability of the colored resin composition over time. can. Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or more functional photoradical polymerization initiators include those listed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No. 2015/004565, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-532675. Dimers of oxime compounds described in paragraph numbers 0407 to 0412, paragraph numbers 0039 to 0055 of International Publication No. 2017/033680, compound (E) and compound ( G), Cmpd1 to 7 described in International Publication No. 2016/034963, oxime ester photoinitiators described in paragraph number 0007 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-523465, Photoinitiators described in paragraph numbers 0020 to 0033, photoinitiators (A) described in paragraph numbers 0017 to 0026 of JP2017-151342A, and photoinitiators (A) described in Japanese Patent No. 6469669. Examples include oxime ester photoinitiators.

 着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤の含有量は0.1~30質量%が好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下が好ましく、15質量%以下がより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less. In the colored composition of the present invention, only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that their total amount falls within the above range.

<<溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、溶剤を含有する。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤の種類は、各成分の溶解性や組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤も好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、2-ペンタノン、3-ペンタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-メチルシクロヘキサノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、シクロヘプタノン、シクロオクタノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブタノール、メチルエチルケトン、ガンマブチロラクトン、スルホラン、アニソール、1,4-ジアセトキシブタン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセタート、二酢酸ブタン-1,3-ジイル、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセタート、ジアセトンアルコール(別名としてダイアセトンアルコール、4-ヒドロキシ-4-メチル-2-ペンタノン)、2-メトキシプロピルアセテート、2-メトキシ-1-プロパノール、イソプロピルアルコールなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<<Solvent>>
The colored composition of the present invention contains a solvent. Examples of the solvent include organic solvents. The type of solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition. Examples of the organic solvent include ester solvents, ketone solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents. For these details, paragraph number 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Ester solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and ketone solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used. Specific examples of organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -Heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol Acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxy Butanol, methyl ethyl ketone, gamma butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane-1,3-diyl diacetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol (also known as Examples include diacetone alcohol, 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), 2-methoxypropyl acetate, 2-methoxy-1-propanol, and isopropyl alcohol. However, it may be better to reduce the amount of aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) used as organic solvents for environmental reasons (for example, 50 mass ppm (parts) based on the total amount of organic solvents). per million), 10 mass ppm or less, and 1 mass ppm or less).

 本発明においては、金属含有量の少ない有機溶剤を用いることが好ましい。有機溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば、10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの有機溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような有機溶剤は,例えば、東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content. It is preferable that the metal content of the organic solvent is, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent at a mass ppt (parts per trillion) level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Kagaku Kogyo Nippo, November 13, 2015). .

 有機溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレン又はナイロンが好ましい。 Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore diameter of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.

 有機溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one type of isomer may be included, or multiple types may be included.

 有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 It is preferable that the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is 0.8 mmol/L or less, and it is more preferable that the organic solvent contains substantially no peroxide.

 着色組成物中における溶剤の含有量は、10~95質量%であることが好ましく、20~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.

 また、本発明の着色組成物は、環境規制の観点から環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないとは、着色組成物中における環境規制物質の含有量が50質量ppm以下であることを意味し、30質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、10質量ppm以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることが特に好ましい。環境規制物質は、例えば、ベンゼン;トルエン、キシレン等のアルキルベンゼン類;クロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化ベンゼン類等が挙げられる。これらは、REACH(Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals)規則、PRTR(Pollutant Release and Transfer Register)法、VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds)規制等のもとに環境規制物質として登録されており、使用量や取り扱い方法が厳しく規制されている。これらの化合物は、着色組成物に用いられる各成分などを製造する際に溶媒として用いられることがあり、残留溶媒として着色組成物中に混入することがある。人への安全性、環境への配慮の観点よりこれらの物質は可能な限り低減することが好ましい。環境規制物質を低減する方法としては、系中を加熱や減圧して環境規制物質の沸点以上にして系中から環境規制物質を留去して低減する方法が挙げられる。また、少量の環境規制物質を留去する場合においては、効率を上げる為に該当溶媒と同等の沸点を有する溶媒と共沸させることも有用である。また、ラジカル重合性を有する化合物を含有する場合、減圧留去中にラジカル重合反応が進行して分子間で架橋してしまうことを抑制するために重合禁止剤等を添加して減圧留去してもよい。これらの留去方法は、原料の段階、原料を反応させた生成物(例えば、重合した後の樹脂溶液や多官能モノマー溶液)の段階、又はこれらの化合物を混ぜて作製した着色組成物の段階などのいずれの段階でも可能である。 Furthermore, from the viewpoint of environmental regulations, it is preferable that the colored composition of the present invention does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances. In the present invention, "not substantially containing environmentally controlled substances" means that the content of environmentally controlled substances in the coloring composition is 50 mass ppm or less, preferably 30 mass ppm or less. , more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less. Examples of environmentally controlled substances include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene. These are REACH (Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals) rules, PRTR (Pollutant Release and It is registered as an environmentally regulated substance under the Transfer Register Act, VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) regulations, etc., and its usage and handling are The method is strictly regulated. These compounds may be used as a solvent when producing each component used in the coloring composition, and may be mixed into the coloring composition as a residual solvent. From the viewpoint of human safety and environmental considerations, it is preferable to reduce the amount of these substances as much as possible. Examples of methods for reducing environmentally controlled substances include a method of heating or reducing pressure in the system to raise the temperature above the boiling point of the environmentally controlled substance to distill off the environmentally controlled substances from the system. Furthermore, when distilling off a small amount of environmentally regulated substances, it is also useful to carry out azeotropy with a solvent having the same boiling point as the relevant solvent in order to increase efficiency. In addition, if a compound that has radical polymerizability is contained, a polymerization inhibitor or the like may be added to prevent the radical polymerization reaction from proceeding during vacuum distillation and crosslinking between molecules. You can. These distillation methods can be used at the stage of raw materials, at the stage of products obtained by reacting raw materials (for example, resin solution or polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or at the stage of colored compositions prepared by mixing these compounds. This is possible at any stage.

<<赤外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、赤外線吸収剤をさらに含有することができる。例えば、本発明の着色組成物を用いて赤外線透過フィルタを形成する場合においては、着色組成物中に赤外線吸収剤を含有させることで得られる膜について透過させる光の波長をより長波長側にシフトさせることができる。赤外線吸収剤は、極大吸収波長を波長700nmよりも長波長側に有する化合物であることが好ましい。赤外線吸収剤は波長700nmを超え1800nm以下の範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物であることが好ましい。また、赤外線吸収剤の波長500nmにおける吸光度Aと極大吸収波長における吸光度Aとの比率A/Aは、0.08以下であることが好ましく、0.04以下であることがより好ましい。
<<Infrared absorber>>
The colored composition of the present invention can further contain an infrared absorber. For example, when forming an infrared transmitting filter using the colored composition of the present invention, the wavelength of light transmitted through the film obtained by incorporating an infrared absorber into the colored composition is shifted to a longer wavelength side. can be done. The infrared absorber is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength on the longer wavelength side than the wavelength of 700 nm. The infrared absorber is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a range of more than 700 nm and less than 1800 nm. Further, the ratio A 1 /A 2 between the absorbance A 1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A 2 at the maximum absorption wavelength of the infrared absorbent is preferably 0.08 or less, and more preferably 0.04 or less. .

 赤外線吸収剤としては、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、クアテリレン化合物、メロシアニン化合物、クロコニウム化合物、オキソノール化合物、イミニウム化合物、ジチオール化合物、トリアリールメタン化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、ジベンゾフラノン化合物、ジチオレン金属錯体、金属酸化物、金属ホウ化物等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落番号0114~0121に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、近赤外線吸収色材としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落番号0121に記載の化合物、特開2020-075959号公報に記載されたスクアリリウム化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0135217号公報に記載の銅錯体などを用いることもできる。また、特開2021-195515号公報に記載のクロコン酸化合物、特開2022-022070号公報に記載の近赤外線吸収性色素を用いることもできる。 Infrared absorbers include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, and azomethine. compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, metal borides, and the like. Specific examples of these include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0114 to 0121 of International Publication No. 2022/065215. In addition, as the near-infrared absorbing coloring material, the compound described in paragraph number 0121 of International Publication No. 2022/065215, the squarylium compound described in JP 2020-075959, and Korean Published Patent No. 10-2019-0135217 Copper complexes described in publications can also be used. Furthermore, the croconic acid compound described in JP-A No. 2021-195515 and the near-infrared absorbing dye described in JP-A No. 2022-022070 can also be used.

 赤外線吸収剤として、欧州特許第3628645号明細書の段落番号0025に記載の下記式で表される酸化タングステンを用いることもできる。
 M (P(O)
 M、Mはアンモニウムカチオン又は金属カチオンを表し、aは0.01~0.5であり、bは0~0.5であり、cは1であり、dは2.5~3であり、eは0.01~0.75であり、nは1、2又は3であり、mは1、2又は3であり、Rは、置換基を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。
As the infrared absorber, tungsten oxide represented by the following formula described in paragraph number 0025 of European Patent No. 3,628,645 can also be used.
M 1 a M 2 b W c O d (P(O) n R m ) e
M 1 and M 2 represent ammonium cations or metal cations, a is 0.01 to 0.5, b is 0 to 0.5, c is 1, and d is 2.5 to 3. , e is 0.01 to 0.75, n is 1, 2 or 3, m is 1, 2 or 3, and R is a hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. represent.

 着色組成物の全固形分中における赤外線吸収剤の含有量は、1~40質量%であることが好ましい。下限は2質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は30質量%以下が好ましく、25質量%以下がより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、赤外線吸収剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。赤外線吸収剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the infrared absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less. The colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of infrared absorber, or may contain two or more types of infrared absorbers. When two or more types of infrared absorbers are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体は例えば分散助剤として用いられる。分散助剤とは、着色組成物中において顔料の分散性を高めるための素材のことである。顔料誘導体としては、色素構造及びトリアジン構造からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造と、酸基又は塩基性基とを有する化合物が挙げられる。
<<Pigment derivative>>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative. Pigment derivatives are used, for example, as dispersion aids. A dispersion aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of pigments in a coloring composition. Examples of the pigment derivative include compounds having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a pigment structure and a triazine structure, and an acid group or a basic group.

 上記色素構造としては、キノリン色素構造、ベンゾイミダゾロン色素構造、ベンゾイソインドール色素構造、ベンゾチアゾール色素構造、イミニウム色素構造、スクアリリウム色素構造、クロコニウム色素構造、オキソノール色素構造、ピロロピロール色素構造、ジケトピロロピロール色素構造、アゾ色素構造、アゾメチン色素構造、フタロシアニン色素構造、ナフタロシアニン色素構造、アントラキノン色素構造、キナクリドン色素構造、ジオキサジン色素構造、ペリノン色素構造、ペリレン色素構造、チアジンインジゴ色素構造、チオインジゴ色素構造、イソインドリン色素構造、イソインドリノン色素構造、キノフタロン色素構造、ジチオール色素構造、トリアリールメタン色素構造、ピロメテン色素構造等が挙げられる。 The above dye structures include quinoline dye structure, benzimidazolone dye structure, benzisoindole dye structure, benzothiazole dye structure, iminium dye structure, squarylium dye structure, croconium dye structure, oxonol dye structure, pyrrolopyrrole dye structure, diketo Pyrrolopyrrole dye structure, azo dye structure, azomethine dye structure, phthalocyanine dye structure, naphthalocyanine dye structure, anthraquinone dye structure, quinacridone dye structure, dioxazine dye structure, perinone dye structure, perylene dye structure, thiazine indigo dye structure, thioindigo dye structure, isoindoline dye structure, isoindolinone dye structure, quinophthalone dye structure, dithiol dye structure, triarylmethane dye structure, pyrromethene dye structure, etc.

 顔料誘導体が有する酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、ボロン酸基、イミド酸基及びこれらの塩等が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子又は原子団としては、アルカリ金属イオン(Li、Na、Kなど)、アルカリ土類金属イオン(Ca2+、Mg2+など)、アンモニウムイオン、イミダゾリウムイオン、ピリジニウムイオン、ホスホニウムイオンなどが挙げられる。イミド酸基としては、-SONHSOX1、-CONHSOX2、-CONHCORX3又はSONHCORX4で表される基が好ましく、-SONHSOX1、-CONHSOX2、又はSONHCORX4で表される基がより好ましく、-SONHSOX1又はCONHSOX2が更に好ましい。RX1~RX4は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。RX1~RX4が表すアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としてはハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、フッ素原子であることがより好ましい。RX1~RX4は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子を含むアルキル基又はフッ素原子を含むアリール基であることが好ましく、フッ素原子を含むアルキル基であることがより好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6が更に好ましい。 Examples of the acid group that the pigment derivative has include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boronic acid group, an imide acid group, and salts thereof. Atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K + , etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ , etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, Examples include phosphonium ions. The imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 , -CONHSO 2 R X2 , -CONHCOR X3 or SO 2 NHCOR or SO 2 NHCOR X4 is more preferred, and -SO 2 NHSO 2 R X1 or CONHSO 2 R X2 is even more preferred. R X1 to R X4 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group and aryl group represented by R X1 to R X4 may have a substituent. The substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom. R X1 to R X4 are each independently preferably an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom, and more preferably an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group containing a fluorine atom is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, and even more preferably 6.

 顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基、ピリジニル基及びその塩、アンモニウム基の塩、並びにフタルイミドメチル基が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子又は原子団としては、水酸化物イオン、ハロゲンイオン、カルボン酸イオン、スルホン酸イオン、フェノキシドイオンなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the basic group that the pigment derivative has include an amino group, a pyridinyl group and its salts, an ammonium group salt, and a phthalimidomethyl group. Examples of atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.

 アミノ基としては、-NRx11x12で表される基、及び、環状アミノ基が挙げられる。 Examples of the amino group include a group represented by -NR x11 R x12 and a cyclic amino group.

 -NRx11x12で表される基において、Rx11及びRx12は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、アルキル基であることが好ましい。すなわち、アミノ基は、ジアルキルアミノ基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状又は分岐状が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては置換基Tが挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては置換基Tが挙げられる。 In the group represented by -NR x11 R x12 , R x11 and R x12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and preferably an alkyl group. That is, the amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include substituent T. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 12. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include substituent T.

 環状アミノ基としては、ピロリジン基、ピペリジン基、ピペラジン基、モルホリン基などが挙げられる。これらの基は更に置換基を有していてもよい。 Examples of the cyclic amino group include a pyrrolidine group, a piperidine group, a piperazine group, and a morpholine group. These groups may further have a substituent.

 顔料誘導体は、可視透明性に優れた顔料誘導体(以下、透明顔料誘導体ともいう)を用いることもできる。透明顔料誘導体の400~700nmの波長領域におけるモル吸光係数の最大値(εmax)は3000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることが好ましく、1000L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがより好ましく、100L・mol-1・cm-1以下であることがさらに好ましい。εmaxの下限は、例えば1L・mol-1・cm-1以上であり、10L・mol-1・cm-1以上でもよい。 As the pigment derivative, a pigment derivative having excellent visible transparency (hereinafter also referred to as a transparent pigment derivative) can be used. The maximum molar extinction coefficient (εmax) of the transparent pigment derivative in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 3000 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or less, and preferably 1000 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or less. is more preferable, and even more preferably 100 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or less. The lower limit of εmax is, for example, 1 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or more, and may be 10 L·mol −1 ·cm −1 or more.

 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の化合物、特開昭56-118462号公報、特開昭63-264674号公報、特開平01-217077号公報、特開平03-009961号公報、特開平03-026767号公報、特開平03-153780号公報、特開平03-045662号公報、特開平04-285669号公報、特開平06-145546号公報、特開平06-212088号公報、特開平06-240158号公報、特開平10-030063号公報、特開平10-195326号公報、国際公開第2011/024896号の段落番号0086~0098、国際公開第2012/102399号の段落番号0063~0094、国際公開第2017/038252号の段落番号0082、特開2015-151530号公報の段落番号0171、特開2011-252065号公報の段落番号0162~0183、特開2003-081972号公報、特許第5299151号公報、特開2015-172732号公報、特開2014-199308号公報、特開2014-085562号公報、特開2014-035351号公報、特開2008-081565号公報に記載の化合物、特開2019-109512号公報に記載の化合物、特開2019-133154号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/002106号に記載のチオール連結基を有するジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2018-168244号公報に記載のベンゾイミダゾロン化合物又はそれらの塩などが挙げられる。顔料誘導体として、特許第6996282号の一般式(1)に記載のイソインドリン骨格を有する化合物を使用してもよい。 Specific examples of pigment derivatives include compounds described in the Examples below, JP-A-56-118462, JP-A-63-264674, JP-A-01-217077, and JP-A-03-009961. , JP 03-026767, JP 03-153780, JP 03-045662, JP 04-285669, JP 06-145546, JP 06-212088, JP-A-06-240158, JP-A-10-030063, JP-A-10-195326, paragraph numbers 0086 to 0098 of International Publication No. 2011/024896, paragraph numbers 0063 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2012/102399 , paragraph number 0082 of International Publication No. 2017/038252, paragraph number 0171 of JP 2015-151530, paragraph number 0162 to 0183 of JP 2011-252065, JP 2003-081972, Patent No. 5299151 No. 2, JP 2015-172732, JP 2014-199308, JP 2014-085562, JP 2014-035351, JP 2008-081565, JP 2019 Compounds described in -109512, compounds described in JP 2019-133154, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds having a thiol linking group described in WO 2020/002106, JP 2018-168244 Examples include the benzimidazolone compounds described above or salts thereof. As the pigment derivative, a compound having an isoindoline skeleton described in the general formula (1) of Japanese Patent No. 6996282 may be used.

 顔料誘導体の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して1~30質量部が好ましく、2~15質量部がより好ましく、4~10質量部が更に好ましい。
 また、顔料誘導体の含有量は、化合物Yの100質量部に対して5~50質量部が好ましく、10~40質量部がより好ましく、15~30質量部が更に好ましい。
 顔料誘導体は1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上併用する場合はそれらの合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by weight, more preferably 2 to 15 parts by weight, and even more preferably 4 to 10 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the pigment.
Further, the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 5 to 50 parts by weight, more preferably 10 to 40 parts by weight, and even more preferably 15 to 30 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of compound Y.
Only one type of pigment derivative may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

<<ポリアルキレンイミン>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、ポリアルキレンイミンを含有することもできる。ポリアルキレンイミンは例えば顔料の分散助剤として用いられる。分散助剤とは、着色組成物中において顔料の分散性を高めるための素材のことである。ポリアルキレンイミンとは、アルキレンイミンを開環重合したポリマーのことである。ポリアルキレンイミンは、1級アミノ基と、2級アミノ基と、3級アミノ基とをそれぞれ含む分岐構造を有するポリマーである。アルキレンイミンの炭素数は2~6が好ましく、2~4がより好ましく、2又は3であることが更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
<<Polyalkyleneimine>>
The colored composition of the present invention can also contain polyalkyleneimine. Polyalkyleneimines are used, for example, as dispersion aids for pigments. A dispersion aid is a material for improving the dispersibility of pigments in a coloring composition. Polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of alkyleneimine. Polyalkyleneimine is a polymer having a branched structure containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group, respectively. The alkylene imine preferably has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, even more preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 carbon atoms.

 ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は、200以上であることが好ましく、250以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、100000以下であることが好ましく、50000以下であることがより好ましく、10000以下であることが更に好ましく、2000以下であることが特に好ましい。なお、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量の値について、構造式から分子量が計算できる場合は、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は構造式から計算した値である。一方、特定アミン化合物の分子量が構造式から計算できない、あるいは、計算が困難な場合には、沸点上昇法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、沸点上昇法でも測定できない、あるいは、測定が困難な場合は、粘度法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、粘度法でも測定できない、あるいは、粘度法での測定が困難な場合は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値での数平均分子量の値を用いる。 The molecular weight of the polyalkylene imine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more. The upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, even more preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2,000 or less. Regarding the value of the molecular weight of polyalkylene imine, if the molecular weight can be calculated from the structural formula, the molecular weight of the polyalkylene imine is the value calculated from the structural formula. On the other hand, if the molecular weight of a specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or is difficult to calculate, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the boiling point elevation method is used. In addition, if measurement cannot be performed by the boiling point elevation method or is difficult to measure, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the viscosity method is used. If the viscosity method cannot be used or it is difficult to measure, the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) is used.

 ポリアルキレンイミンのアミン価は5mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、15mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。 The amine value of the polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol/g or more, more preferably 10 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol/g or more.

 アルキレンイミンの具体例としては、エチレンイミン、プロピレンイミン、1,2-ブチレンイミン、2,3-ブチレンイミンなどが挙げられ、エチレンイミン又はプロピレンイミンであることが好ましく、エチレンイミンであることがより好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、ポリエチレンイミンであることが特に好ましい。また、ポリエチレンイミンは、1級アミノ基を、1級アミノ基と2級アミノ基と3級アミノ基との合計に対して10モル%以上含むことが好ましく、20モル%以上含むことがより好ましく、30モル%以上含むことが更に好ましい。ポリエチレンイミンの市販品としては、エポミンSP-003、SP-006、SP-012、SP-018、SP-200、P-1000(以上、(株)日本触媒製)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of alkyleneimine include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, 2,3-butyleneimine, etc. Ethyleneimine or propyleneimine is preferable, and ethyleneimine is more preferable. preferable. It is particularly preferred that the polyalkyleneimine is polyethyleneimine. Further, the polyethyleneimine preferably contains 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more of primary amino groups based on the total of primary amino groups, secondary amino groups, and tertiary amino groups. , more preferably 30 mol% or more. Commercial products of polyethyleneimine include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, and P-1000 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).

 着色組成物の全固形分中におけるポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は0.1~5質量%であることが好ましい。下限は0.2質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は4.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、4質量%以下であることがより好ましく、3質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、ポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して0.5~20質量部であることが好ましい。下限は0.6質量部以上であることが好ましく、1質量部以上であることがより好ましく、2質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は10質量部以下であることが好ましく、8質量部以下であることがより好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合はそれらの合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 4.5% by mass or less, more preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less. Further, the content of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the pigment. The lower limit is preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, more preferably 1 part by mass or more, and even more preferably 2 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, more preferably 8 parts by mass or less. Only one type of polyalkylene imine may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

<<硬化促進剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、硬化促進剤を含んでもよい。硬化促進剤としては、チオール化合物、メチロール化合物、アミン化合物、ホスホニウム塩化合物、アミジン塩化合物、アミド化合物、塩基発生剤、イソシアネート化合物、アルコキシシラン化合物、オニウム塩化合物などが挙げられる。硬化促進剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/056189号の段落番号0094~0097に記載の化合物、特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0246~0253に記載の化合物、特開2013-041165号公報の段落番号0186~0251に記載の化合物、特開2014-055114号公報に記載のイオン性化合物、特開2012-150180号公報の段落番号0071~0080に記載の化合物、特開2011-253054号公報に記載のエポキシ基を有するアルコキシシラン化合物、特許第5765059号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載の化合物、特開2017-036379号公報に記載のカルボキシ基含有エポキシ硬化剤、特開2021-181406号公報に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。着色組成物の全固形分中における硬化促進剤の含有量は0.3~8.9質量%が好ましく、0.8~6.4質量%がより好ましい。
<<Curing accelerator>>
The colored composition of the present invention may also contain a curing accelerator. Examples of the curing accelerator include thiol compounds, methylol compounds, amine compounds, phosphonium salt compounds, amidine salt compounds, amide compounds, base generators, isocyanate compounds, alkoxysilane compounds, onium salt compounds, and the like. Specific examples of the curing accelerator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0094 to 0097 of International Publication No. 2018/056189, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0246 to 0253 of JP 2015-034963, and JP 2013-041165. Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0186 to 0251 of JP-A No. 2014-055114, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0071 to 0080 of JP-A-2012-150180, JP-A-2011-253054 Alkoxysilane compounds having epoxy groups as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5765059, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0085 to 0092 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 5765059, carboxyl group-containing epoxy curing agents described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-036379, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021- Examples include compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 181406. The content of the curing accelerator in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass.

<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤としては、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物などが挙げられる。このような化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0179に記載の化合物、特開2021-178918号公報に記載の反応性トリアジン紫外線吸収剤、特開2022-007884号公報に記載の紫外線吸収剤を用いることもできる。
<<Ultraviolet absorber>>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber. Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and the like. Specific examples of such compounds include the compound described in paragraph number 0179 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the reactive triazine ultraviolet absorber described in JP 2021-178918, and JP 2022-007884. It is also possible to use the ultraviolet absorbers described in .

 着色組成物の全固形分中における紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~5質量%がより好ましい。本発明において、紫外線吸収剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass. In the present invention, only one type of ultraviolet absorber may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.

<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)が挙げられる。中でも、p-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。着色組成物の全固形分中における重合禁止剤の含有量は、0.0001~5質量%が好ましい。重合禁止剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Polymerization inhibitor>>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor. Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), Examples include 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol) and N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Among them, p-methoxyphenol is preferred. The content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass. The number of polymerization inhibitors may be one, or two or more. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.

<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。本発明において、シランカップリング剤は、加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基とを有するシラン化合物を意味する。また、加水分解性基とは、ケイ素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び縮合反応の少なくともいずれかによってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基などが挙げられ、アルコキシ基が好ましい。すなわち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、加水分解性基以外の官能基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、メルカプト基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アミノ基、ウレイド基、スルフィド基、イソシアネート基、フェニル基などが挙げられ、アミノ基、(メタ)アクリロイル基及びエポキシ基が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-602)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-603)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBE-602)、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-903)、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-502)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-503)等がある。また、シランカップリング剤の具体例については、特開2009-288703号公報の段落番号0018~0036に記載の化合物、特開2009-242604号公報の段落番号0056~0066に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。着色組成物の全固形分中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、0.01~15.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~10.0質量%がより好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Silane coupling agent>>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent. In the present invention, the silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups. Furthermore, the term "hydrolyzable group" refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond through at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and an alkoxy group is preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group. Examples of functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, mercapto groups, epoxy groups, oxetanyl groups, amino groups, ureido groups, sulfide groups, and isocyanate groups. , phenyl group, etc., and amino group, (meth)acryloyl group and epoxy group are preferable. Specific examples of silane coupling agents include N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-602), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-amino Propyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-603), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-602), γ-Aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-903), γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-903), 3-methacryloxy Examples include propylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-502), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-503), and the like. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018 to 0036 of JP-A No. 2009-288703 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0056 to 0066 of JP-A No. 2009-242604. , the contents of which are incorporated herein. The content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the colored composition is preferably 0.01 to 15.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0% by mass. Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.

<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤はシリコーン系界面活性剤又はフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましい。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0238~0245に記載された界面活性剤を参照することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<<Surfactant>>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as fluorine surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicone surfactants can be used. The surfactant is preferably a silicone surfactant or a fluorine surfactant. Regarding the surfactant, reference can be made to the surfactants described in paragraph numbers 0238 to 0245 of International Publication No. 2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein.

 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorine surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid saving, and has good solubility in the coloring composition.

 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0167~0169に記載の化合物を用いることができる。 As the fluorine-based surfactant, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0167 to 0169 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.

 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。また、特開2010-032698号公報の段落番号0016~0037に記載されたフッ素含有界面活性剤や、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。

 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3000~50000であり、例えば、14000である。上記の化合物中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。
A block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant. The fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group, propyleneoxy group) (meth). A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used. Further, the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A No. 2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-containing surfactant used in the present invention.

The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example 14,000. In the above compounds, % indicating the proportion of repeating units is mol%.

 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落番号0050~0090及び段落番号0289~0295に記載された化合物、DIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落番号0015~0158、特開2022-000494号公報に記載の含フッ素共重合体に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain can also be used. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295 of JP-A No. 2010-164965, Megafac RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation, Examples include RS-72-K. Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A No. 2015-117327 and fluorine-containing copolymers described in JP-A No. 2022-000494 can also be used.

 また、国際公開第2020/084854号に記載の界面活性剤を、炭素数6以上のパーフルオロアルキル基を有する界面活性剤の代替として用いることも、環境規制の観点から好ましい。 Furthermore, it is also preferable from the viewpoint of environmental regulations to use the surfactant described in International Publication No. 2020/084854 as a substitute for a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms.

 また、式(fi-1)で表される含フッ素イミド塩化合物を界面活性剤として用いることも好ましい。

 式(fi-1)中、mは1又は2を表し、nは1~4の整数を表し、aは1又は2を表し、Xa+はa価の金属イオン、第1級アンモニウムイオン、第2級アンモニウムイオン、第3級アンモニウムイオン、第4級アンモニウムイオン又はNH を表す。
It is also preferable to use a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by formula (fi-1) as a surfactant.

In formula (fi-1), m represents 1 or 2, n represents an integer of 1 to 4, a represents 1 or 2, and X a+ represents an a-valent metal ion, a primary ammonium ion, or Represents a secondary ammonium ion, a tertiary ammonium ion, a quaternary ammonium ion, or NH 4 + .

 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0174に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of nonionic surfactants include compounds described in paragraph 0174 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.

 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、DOWSIL SH8400、SH8400 FLUID、FZ-2122、67 Additive、74 Additive、M Additive、SF 8419 OIL(以上、ダウ・東レ(株)製)、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP-341、KF-6000、KF-6001、KF-6002、KF-6003(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、BYK-307、BYK-322、BYK-323、BYK-330、BYK-333、BYK-3760、BYK-UV3510(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, SF 8419 OIL (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.), and TSF- 4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (manufactured by BYK Chemie), and the like.

 また、シリコーン系界面活性剤には下記構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
Moreover, a compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone surfactant.

 着色組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001質量%~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%がより好ましい。界面活性剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% to 3.0% by mass. The number of surfactants may be one, or two or more. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.

<<酸化防止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有することができる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール化合物、亜リン酸エステル化合物、チオエーテル化合物などが挙げられる。フェノール化合物としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤として知られる任意のフェノール化合物を使用することができる。好ましいフェノール化合物としては、ヒンダードフェノール化合物が挙げられる。フェノール性ヒドロキシ基に隣接する部位(オルト位)に置換基を有する化合物が好ましい。前述の置換基としては炭素数1~22の置換又は無置換のアルキル基が好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、同一分子内にフェノール基と亜リン酸エステル基を有する化合物も好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、リン系酸化防止剤も好適に使用することができる。リン系酸化防止剤としてはトリス[2-[[2,4,8,10-テトラキス(1,1-ジメチルエチル)ジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-6-イル]オキシ]エチル]アミン、トリス[2-[(4,6,9,11-テトラ-tert-ブチルジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-2-イル)オキシ]エチル]アミン、亜リン酸エチルビス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチル-6-メチルフェニル)などが挙げられる。酸化防止剤の市販品としては、例えば、アデカスタブ AO-20、アデカスタブ AO-30、アデカスタブ AO-40、アデカスタブ AO-50、アデカスタブ AO-50F、アデカスタブ AO-60、アデカスタブ AO-60G、アデカスタブ AO-80、アデカスタブ AO-330(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。また、酸化防止剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0023~0048に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/006600号に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/164024号に記載された化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0059371号公報に記載された化合物を使用することもできる。着色組成物の全固形分中における酸化防止剤の含有量は、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~15質量%であることがより好ましい。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Antioxidant>>
The colored composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant. Examples of antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite compounds, thioether compounds, and the like. As the phenol compound, any phenol compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used. Preferred phenol compounds include hindered phenol compounds. A compound having a substituent at a site adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position) is preferred. The above-mentioned substituents are preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 22 carbon atoms. Further, as the antioxidant, a compound having a phenol group and a phosphorous acid ester group in the same molecule is also preferable. Further, as the antioxidant, phosphorus-based antioxidants can also be suitably used. As a phosphorus antioxidant, tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepine-6 -yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl )oxy]ethyl]amine, ethylbis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite, and the like. Commercially available antioxidants include, for example, Adekastab AO-20, Adekastab AO-30, Adekastab AO-40, Adekastab AO-50, Adekastab AO-50F, Adekastab AO-60, Adekastab AO-60G, Adekastab AO-80. , ADEKA STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.). In addition, antioxidants include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0023 to 0048 of Patent No. 6268967, compounds described in International Publication No. 2017/006600, compounds described in International Publication No. 2017/164024, Compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371 can also be used. The content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount falls within the above range.

<<その他成分>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、増感剤、硬化促進剤、フィラー、熱硬化促進剤、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、連鎖移動剤など)を含有してもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0182に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
<<Other ingredients>>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain sensitizers, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers, and other auxiliary agents (e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, (leveling agents, peeling accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.) may also be included. By appropriately containing these components, properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted. Examples of these components include the compounds described in paragraph 0182 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.

 本発明の着色組成物は、得られる膜の屈折率を調整するために金属酸化物を含有させてもよい。金属酸化物としては、TiO、ZrO、Al、SiO等が挙げられる。金属酸化物の一次粒子径は1~100nmが好ましく、3~70nmがより好ましく、5~50nmが更に好ましい。金属酸化物はコア-シェル構造を有していてもよい。また、この場合、コア部は中空状であってもよい。 The colored composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide in order to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film. Examples of metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , and SiO 2 . The primary particle diameter of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, and even more preferably 5 to 50 nm. The metal oxide may have a core-shell structure. Further, in this case, the core portion may be hollow.

 本発明の着色組成物は、耐光性改良剤を含んでもよい。耐光性改良剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0183に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 The colored composition of the present invention may also contain a lightfastness improver. Examples of the light resistance improver include compounds described in paragraph 0183 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.

 本発明の着色組成物は、テレフタル酸エステルを実質的に含まないことも好ましい。ここで、「実質的に含まない」とは、テレフタル酸エステルの含有量が、着色組成物の全量中、1000質量ppb以下であることを意味し、100質量ppb以下であることがより好ましく、ゼロであることが特に好ましい。
 本発明の着色樹脂組成物は、遊離の金属含有量が100ppm以下であることが好ましく、50ppmいかであることがより好ましい。また、遊離のハロゲン含有量は100ppm以下であることが好ましく、50ppm以下であることがより好ましい。着色樹脂組成物中の遊離の金属やハロゲンの低減方法としては、イオン交換水による洗浄、ろ過、限外ろ過、イオン交換重視による精製等の方法が挙げられる。
It is also preferred that the colored composition of the present invention is substantially free of terephthalate. Here, "substantially not containing" means that the content of terephthalic acid ester is 1000 mass ppb or less in the total amount of the coloring composition, more preferably 100 mass ppb or less, Particularly preferred is zero.
The colored resin composition of the present invention preferably has a free metal content of 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Further, the free halogen content is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Examples of methods for reducing free metals and halogens in the colored resin composition include methods such as washing with ion-exchanged water, filtration, ultrafiltration, and purification with emphasis on ion exchange.

 環境規制の観点から、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用が規制されることがある。本発明の着色組成物において、上記した化合物の含有率を小さくする場合、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸)及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸)及びその塩の含有率は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01ppb~1,000ppbの範囲であることが好ましく、0.05ppb~500ppbの範囲であることがより好ましく、0.1ppb~300ppbの範囲であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まなくてもよい。例えば、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物を用いることで、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まない着色組成物を選択してもよい。規制化合物の代替となりうる化合物としては、例えば、パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数の違いによって規制対象から除外された化合物が挙げられる。ただし、上記した内容は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用を妨げるものではない。本発明の着色組成物は、許容される最大の範囲内で、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を含んでもよい。 From the perspective of environmental regulations, the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acids and their salts, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acids and their salts may be regulated. In the coloring composition of the present invention, when reducing the content of the above-mentioned compounds, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids (particularly perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids whose perfluoroalkyl group has 6 to 8 carbon atoms), salts thereof, and perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids, The content of fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid whose perfluoroalkyl group has 6 to 8 carbon atoms) and its salt is 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably in the range of , more preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb. The coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salt. For example, by using a compound that can be substituted for perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and a compound that can be substituted for perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid You may select a coloring composition that is substantially free of and salts thereof. Compounds that can be substituted for regulated compounds include, for example, compounds that are excluded from regulated targets due to differences in the number of carbon atoms in perfluoroalkyl groups. However, the above content does not preclude the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acids and salts thereof, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acids and salts thereof. The colored compositions of the present invention may include perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acids and salts thereof, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acids and salts thereof, to the maximum extent permissible.

 本発明の着色組成物の含水率は、通常3質量%以下であり、0.01~1.5質量%が好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%の範囲であることがより好ましい。含水率は、カールフィッシャー法にて測定することができる。 The water content of the colored composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass. The water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.

 本発明の着色組成物は、膜面状(平坦性など)の調整、膜厚の調整などを目的として粘度を調整して用いることができる。粘度の値は必要に応じて適宜選択することができるが、例えば、25℃において0.3mPa・s~50mPa・sが好ましく、0.5mPa・s~20mPa・sがより好ましい。粘度の測定方法としては、例えば、コーンプレートタイプの粘度計を使用し、25℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定することができる。 The colored composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface condition (flatness, etc.), adjusting the film thickness, etc. The value of viscosity can be appropriately selected as required, but for example, at 25° C., 0.3 mPa·s to 50 mPa·s is preferable, and 0.5 mPa·s to 20 mPa·s is more preferable. The viscosity can be measured using, for example, a cone plate type viscometer with the temperature adjusted to 25°C.

<<収容容器>>
 着色組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0187に記載の容器を用いることができる。
<<Storage container>>
The container for storing the coloring composition is not particularly limited, and any known container can be used. Further, as the storage container, the container described in paragraph 0187 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.

<着色組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。着色組成物の調製に際しては、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解及び/又は分散して着色組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液又は分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して着色組成物を調製してもよい。
<Method for preparing colored composition>
The colored composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components. When preparing a colored composition, the colored composition may be prepared by dissolving and/or dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time, or, if necessary, each component may be prepared as two or more solutions or dispersions as appropriate. A colored composition may be prepared by mixing these at the time of use (at the time of application).

 また、着色組成物の調製に際して、顔料を分散させるプロセスを含むことが好ましい。顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいて、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における顔料の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、顔料を分散させるプロセス及び分散機は、「分散技術大全集、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば、特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。 Furthermore, it is preferable to include a process of dispersing pigments when preparing the colored composition. In the process of dispersing pigments, mechanical forces used for dispersing pigments include compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation, and the like. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion, and the like. In addition, when pulverizing pigments in a sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use small-diameter beads or increase the filling rate of the beads, thereby increasing the pulverizing efficiency. Further, it is preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, etc. after the pulverization treatment. In addition, the process and dispersion machine for dispersing pigments are described in ``Complete Works of Dispersion Technology, Published by Information Technology Corporation, July 15, 2005'' and ``Dispersion technology centered on suspension (solid/liquid dispersion system) and industrial The process and dispersion machine described in Paragraph No. 0022 of JP 2015-157893 A, "Practical Application Comprehensive Data Collection, Published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be suitably used. Further, in the process of dispersing the pigment, the particles may be made finer in a salt milling step. For the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling process, the descriptions in JP-A No. 2015-194521 and JP-A No. 2012-046629 can be referred to, for example.

 着色組成物の調製にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、着色組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。ろ過に用いるフィルタの種類およびろ過方法としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0196~0199に記載のフィルタおよびろ過方法が挙げられる。 In preparing the colored composition, it is preferable to filter the colored composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects. Examples of the type of filter and filtration method used for filtration include the filters and filtration methods described in paragraph numbers 0196 to 0199 of International Publication No. 2022/085485.

<膜>
 本発明の膜は、上述した本発明の着色組成物から得られる膜である。本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタや赤外線透過フィルタなどの光学フィルタに用いることができる。
<Membrane>
The film of the present invention is a film obtained from the colored composition of the present invention described above. The film of the present invention can be used for optical filters such as color filters and infrared transmission filters.

 本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。例えば、膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上がさらに好ましい。 The film thickness of the film of the present invention can be adjusted as appropriate depending on the purpose. For example, the film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, and even more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.3 μm or more.

 本発明の膜をカラーフィルタとして用いる場合、本発明の膜は、緑色、赤色、青色、シアン色、マゼンタ色又は黄色の色相を有することが好ましく、緑色、赤色又は黄色の色相を有することがより好ましい。また、本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタの着色画素として好ましく用いることができる。着色画素としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられ、赤色画素、緑色画素及び黄色画素であることが好ましく、赤色画素又は緑色画素であることがより好ましく、緑色画素であることが更に好ましい。 When the film of the present invention is used as a color filter, the film of the present invention preferably has a green, red, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow hue, more preferably a green, red, or yellow hue. preferable. Further, the film of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, yellow pixels, etc., and preferably red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels, and red pixels or green pixels. More preferably, it is a green pixel, and even more preferably a green pixel.

 また、本発明の膜は、光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。なかでも、光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲と、575~625nmの波長範囲のそれぞれに存在することが好ましい。この態様において、光透過率が50%となる短波長側の波長は、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。また、光透過率が50%となる長波長側の波長は、580~620nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、585~615nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。このような分光特性を有する膜は、緑色画素として好ましく用いられる。 Further, in the film of the present invention, the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, and more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. More preferably, it exists within the wavelength range. Among these, it is preferable that the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% exists in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the short wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Further, the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a green pixel.

 本発明の膜を赤外線透過フィルタとして用いる場合、本発明の膜は、例えば、以下の(1)~(4)のいずれかの分光特性を有することが好ましい。
 (1):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~640nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長800~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~640nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長700nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
 (2):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~750nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長900~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である膜。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~750nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長850nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
 (3):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~830nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長1000~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である膜。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~830nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長940nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
 (4):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~950nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長1100~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である膜。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~950nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長1040nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
When the film of the present invention is used as an infrared transmission filter, the film of the present invention preferably has, for example, any one of the following spectral properties (1) to (4).
(1): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is The minimum value of the ratio in the wavelength range of 800 to 1300 nm is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more). A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm and transmit light with wavelengths exceeding 700 nm.
(2): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is A film having a minimum value of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 900 to 1300 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm and transmit light with a wavelength exceeding 850 nm.
(3): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is A film having a minimum value of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1000 to 1300 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm and transmit light with a wavelength exceeding 940 nm.
(4): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film is A film having a minimum value of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1300 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in a wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm and transmit light with a wavelength exceeding 1040 nm.

<膜の製造方法>
 次に、本発明の膜の製造方法について説明する。本発明の膜は、本発明の着色組成物を塗布する工程を経て製造できる。膜の製造方法においては、更にパターン(画素)を形成する工程を含むことが好ましい。パターン(画素)の形成方法としては、フォトリソグラフィ法、ドライエッチング法が挙げられ、フォトリソグラフィ法が好ましい。
<Membrane manufacturing method>
Next, a method for manufacturing the membrane of the present invention will be explained. The film of the present invention can be manufactured through a step of applying the colored composition of the present invention. The film manufacturing method preferably further includes a step of forming a pattern (pixel). Examples of methods for forming patterns (pixels) include photolithography and dry etching, with photolithography being preferred.

 フォトリソグラフィ法によるパターン形成は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する工程と、を含むことが好ましい。必要に応じて、着色組成物層をベークする工程(プリベーク工程)、及び、現像されたパターン(画素)をベークする工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。 Pattern formation by the photolithography method includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of exposing the colored composition layer to light in a pattern, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer to light. It is preferable to include a step of developing and removing the exposed portion to form a pattern (pixel). If necessary, a step of baking the colored composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixel) (post-bake step) may be provided.

 着色組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、特に限定は無く、用途に応じて適宜選択できる。例えば、ガラス基板、シリコン基板などが挙げられ、シリコン基板であることが好ましい。また、シリコン基板には、電荷結合素子(CCD)、相補型金属酸化膜半導体(CMOS)、透明導電膜などが形成されていてもよい。また、シリコン基板には、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリクスが形成されている場合もある。また、シリコン基板には、上部の層との密着性改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下地層が設けられていてもよい。下地層は、本明細書に記載の着色組成物から着色剤を除いた組成物や、本明細書記載の樹脂、重合性化合物、界面活性剤などを含む組成物などを用いて形成してもよい。下地層の表面接触角は、ジヨードメタンで測定した際に20~70°であることが好ましい。また、水で測定した際に30~80°であることが好ましい。 In the step of forming a colored composition layer, a colored composition layer is formed on a support using the colored composition of the present invention. The support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application. For example, a glass substrate, a silicon substrate, etc. may be mentioned, and a silicon substrate is preferable. Further, a charge coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, etc. may be formed on the silicon substrate. Further, a black matrix that isolates each pixel may be formed on the silicon substrate. Further, the silicon substrate may be provided with a base layer for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing substance diffusion, or flattening the substrate surface. The base layer may be formed using a composition obtained by removing the coloring agent from the colored composition described herein, or a composition containing the resin described herein, a polymerizable compound, a surfactant, etc. good. The surface contact angle of the underlayer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferable that the angle is 30 to 80° when measured with water.

 着色組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0207に記載の塗布方法を用いることができる。 A known method can be used to apply the coloring composition. For example, the coating method described in paragraph number 0207 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.

 支持体上に形成した着色組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。低温プロセスにより膜を製造する場合は、プリベークを行わなくてもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、110℃以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上とすることもできる。プリベーク時間は、10~300秒が好ましく、40~250秒がより好ましく、80~220秒がさらに好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). If the film is manufactured by a low-temperature process, prebaking may not be performed. When prebaking is performed, the prebaking temperature is preferably 150°C or lower, more preferably 120°C or lower, and even more preferably 110°C or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 50°C or higher, or 80°C or higher. The prebake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Prebaking can be performed on a hot plate, oven, or the like.

 次に、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー露光機やスキャナ露光機などを用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン状に露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。 Next, the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step). For example, the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing it to light through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. This allows the exposed portion to be cured.

 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等が挙げられる。また、波長300nm以下の光(好ましくは波長180~300nmの光)を用いることもできる。波長300nm以下の光としては、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、KrF線(波長248nm)が好ましい。また、300nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。光源としては、無電極紫外線ランプシステム、紫外線と赤外線のハイブリッド硬化を使用することができる。 Radiation (light) that can be used during exposure includes g-line, i-line, etc. Furthermore, light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm), ArF rays (wavelength 193 nm), and KrF rays (wavelength 248 nm). Furthermore, a long-wave light source of 300 nm or more can also be used. As a light source, an electrodeless ultraviolet lamp system, a hybrid ultraviolet and infrared curing can be used.

 また、露光に際して、光を連続的に照射して露光してもよく、パルス的に照射して露光(パルス露光)してもよい。なお、パルス露光とは、短時間(例えば、ミリ秒レベル以下)のサイクルで光の照射と休止を繰り返して露光する方式の露光方法のことである。 Furthermore, during exposure, light may be exposed by continuous irradiation, or exposure may be performed by irradiation in pulses (pulse exposure). Note that pulse exposure is an exposure method in which exposure is performed by repeating light irradiation and pauses in short cycles (for example, on the millisecond level or less).

 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましい。露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば、酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、又は、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、又は、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m~100000W/m(例えば、5000W/m、15000W/m、又は、35000W/m)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/mなどとすることができる。 The irradiation amount (exposure amount) is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2 . The oxygen concentration during exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to being carried out in the atmosphere, for example, exposure may be carried out in a low-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, or substantially The exposure may be carried out in an oxygen-free atmosphere (without oxygen), or in a high oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of more than 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume). Further, the exposure illuminance can be set appropriately, and is usually selected from the range of 1000W/m 2 to 100000W/m 2 (for example, 5000W/m 2 , 15000W/m 2 , or 35000W/m 2 ). Can be done. The oxygen concentration and the exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined. For example, the illuminance may be 10,000 W/m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 10% by volume, and 20,000 W/m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 35% by volume.

 次に、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する。着色組成物層の未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 Next, the unexposed portions of the colored composition layer are developed and removed to form a pattern (pixel). The unexposed areas of the colored composition layer can be removed by development using a developer. As a result, the unexposed portions of the colored composition layer in the exposure step are eluted into the developer, leaving only the photocured portions. The temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30°C. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to improve the ability to remove residues, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.

 現像液は、有機溶剤、アルカリ現像液などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像液が好ましく用いられる。現像液、および、現像後の洗浄(リンス)方法については、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0214に記載の現像液や洗浄方法を用いることができる。 Examples of the developer include organic solvents, alkaline developers, and alkaline developers are preferably used. Regarding the developer and the cleaning (rinsing) method after development, the developer and cleaning method described in paragraph number 0214 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 can be used.

 現像後、乾燥を施した後に追加露光処理や加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。追加露光処理やポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の硬化処理である。ポストベークにおける加熱温度は、例えば、100~240℃が好ましく、200~240℃がより好ましい。ポストベークは、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。追加露光処理を行う場合、露光に用いられる光は、波長400nm以下の光であることが好ましい。また、追加露光処理は、韓国公開特許第10-2017-0122130号公報に記載された方法で行ってもよい。 After development, it is preferable to perform additional exposure treatment or heat treatment (post-bake) after drying. Additional exposure processing and post-bake are post-development curing processing to complete curing. The heating temperature in post-baking is, for example, preferably 100 to 240°C, more preferably 200 to 240°C. Post-baking can be carried out in a continuous or batch manner using a heating means such as a hot plate, convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), or high-frequency heater to maintain the developed film under the above conditions. . When performing additional exposure processing, the light used for exposure is preferably light with a wavelength of 400 nm or less. Further, the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.

 ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成し、この着色組成物層の全体を硬化させて硬化物層を形成する工程と、この硬化物層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、フォトレジスト層をパターン状に露光したのち、現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、このレジストパターンをマスクとして硬化物層に対してエッチングガスを用いてドライエッチングする工程と、を含むことが好ましい。フォトレジスト層の形成においては、更にプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジスト層の形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成については、特開2013-064993号公報の段落番号0010~0067の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Pattern formation by the dry etching method includes the steps of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and curing the entire colored composition layer to form a cured product layer; A step of forming a photoresist layer on this cured material layer, a step of exposing the photoresist layer in a pattern and then developing it to form a resist pattern, and etching the cured material layer using this resist pattern as a mask. It is preferable to include a step of dry etching using gas. In forming the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a prebaking process. In particular, as a process for forming the photoresist layer, it is desirable to perform a heat treatment after exposure and a heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment). Regarding pattern formation by the dry etching method, the descriptions in paragraphs 0010 to 0067 of JP-A No. 2013-064993 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated into the present specification.

<光学フィルタ>
 本発明の光学フィルタは、上述した本発明の膜を有する。光学フィルタの種類としては、カラーフィルタ及び赤外線透過フィルタが挙げられ、カラーフィルタであることが好ましい。カラーフィルタとしては、カラーフィルタの着色画素として本発明の膜を有することが好ましい。
<Optical filter>
The optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above. Types of optical filters include color filters and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred. As a color filter, it is preferable to have the film of the present invention as a colored pixel of the color filter.

 光学フィルタは、本発明の膜の表面に保護層が設けられていてもよい。保護層を設けることで、酸素遮断化、低反射化、親疎水化、特定波長の光(紫外線、近赤外線等)の遮蔽等の種々の機能を付与することができる。保護層の厚さとしては、0.01~10μmが好ましく、0.1~5μmがより好ましい。保護層の形成方法としては、有機溶剤に溶解した樹脂組成物を塗布して形成する方法、化学気相蒸着法、成型した樹脂を接着材で貼りつける方法等が挙げられる。保護層を構成する成分としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、ポリオール樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アラミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、変性シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリアクリロニトリル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、Si、C、W、Al、Mo、SiO、Siなどが挙げられ、これらの成分を二種以上含有しても良い。例えば、酸素遮断化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層はポリオール樹脂と、SiOと、Siを含むことが好ましい。また、低反射化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層は(メタ)アクリル樹脂とフッ素樹脂を含むことが好ましい。 The optical filter may be provided with a protective layer on the surface of the film of the present invention. By providing a protective layer, various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, hydrophilic and hydrophobic properties, and shielding of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.) can be imparted. The thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 5 μm. Examples of methods for forming the protective layer include a method of coating a resin composition dissolved in an organic solvent, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of pasting a molded resin with an adhesive. Components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resin, ene thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, and polyimide. Resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, polyol resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, aramid resin, polyamide resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, modified silicone resin, fluorine Examples include resin, polycarbonate resin, polyacrylonitrile resin, cellulose resin, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , Si 2 N 4 and the like, and two or more of these components may be contained. For example, in the case of a protective layer intended for oxygen blocking, the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 and Si 2 N 4 . Furthermore, in the case of a protective layer intended for low reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.

 樹脂組成物を塗布して保護層を形成する場合、樹脂組成物の塗布方法としては、スピンコート法、キャスト法、スクリーン印刷法、インクジェット法等の公知の方法を用いることができる。樹脂組成物に含まれる有機溶剤は、公知の有機溶剤(例えば、プロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート、シクロペンタノン、乳酸エチル等)を用いることが出来る。保護層を化学気相蒸着法にて形成する場合、化学気相蒸着法としては、公知の化学気相蒸着法(熱化学気相蒸着法、プラズマ化学気相蒸着法、光化学気相蒸着法)を用いることができる。 When forming a protective layer by applying a resin composition, known methods such as a spin coating method, a casting method, a screen printing method, an inkjet method, etc. can be used as a method for applying the resin composition. As the organic solvent contained in the resin composition, known organic solvents (eg, propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.) can be used. When forming the protective layer by chemical vapor deposition, known chemical vapor deposition methods (thermal chemical vapor deposition, plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition) can be used as the chemical vapor deposition method. can be used.

 保護層は、必要に応じて、有機・無機微粒子、特定波長の光(例えば、紫外線、近赤外線等)の吸収剤、屈折率調整剤、酸化防止剤、密着剤、界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有しても良い。有機・無機微粒子の例としては、例えば、高分子微粒子(例えば、シリコーン樹脂微粒子、ポリスチレン微粒子、メラミン樹脂微粒子)、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化アルミニウム、窒化チタン、酸窒化チタン、フッ化マグネシウム、中空シリカ、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム等が挙げられる。特定波長の光の吸収剤は公知の吸収剤を用いることができる。これらの添加剤の含有量は適宜調整できるが、保護層の全質量に対して0.1~70質量%が好ましく、1~60質量%がさらに好ましい。 The protective layer may contain organic/inorganic fine particles, absorbers for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.), refractive index adjusters, antioxidants, adhesives, surfactants, and other additives, as necessary. It may contain. Examples of organic/inorganic fine particles include polymer fine particles (e.g., silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride. , magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, and the like. As the absorber for light of a specific wavelength, a known absorber can be used. The content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by weight, more preferably 1 to 60% by weight, based on the total weight of the protective layer.

 また、保護層としては、特開2017-151176号公報の段落番号0073~0092に記載の保護層を用いることもできる。 Furthermore, as the protective layer, the protective layers described in paragraph numbers 0073 to 0092 of JP-A No. 2017-151176 can also be used.

 光学フィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。 The optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned into a lattice shape by partition walls, for example.

<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明の膜を備え、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state imaging device>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above. The structure of the solid-state image sensor is not particularly limited as long as it includes the film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state image sensor, but examples include the following structure.

 基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCD(電荷結合素子)イメージセンサ、CMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)イメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオード及びポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオード及び転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口した遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面及びフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、カラーフィルタを有する構成である。更に、デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(基板に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。また、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素よりも低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報、国際公開第2018/043654号に記載の装置が挙げられる。また、特開2019-211559号公報の中で示しているように固体撮像素子の構造内に紫外線吸収層を設けて耐光性を改良してもよい。本発明の固体撮像素子を備えた撮像装置は、デジタルカメラや、撮像機能を有する電子機器(携帯電話等)の他、車載カメラや監視カメラ用としても用いることができる。 On the substrate, there are a plurality of photodiodes that constitute the light receiving area of a solid-state image sensor (CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.) and a transfer electrode made of polysilicon or the like. A device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like is formed on the light shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light shielding film and the light receiving part of the photodiode. It has a configuration in which a color filter is provided on the device protective film. Furthermore, a configuration in which a light condensing means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter) is provided on the device protective film and below the color filter (on the side closer to the substrate), or a configuration in which the condensing means is provided on the color filter, etc. There may be. Further, the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned into, for example, a lattice shape by partition walls. In this case, the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each colored pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include devices described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-227478, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-179577, and International Publication No. 2018/043654. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2019-211559, an ultraviolet absorbing layer may be provided within the structure of the solid-state image sensor to improve light resistance. An imaging device equipped with the solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used not only as a digital camera or an electronic device having an imaging function (such as a mobile phone), but also as a vehicle-mounted camera or a surveillance camera.

<画像表示装置>
 本発明の画像表示装置は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。画像表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。画像表示装置の定義や各画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Image display device>
The image display device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above. Examples of the image display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device. For definitions of image display devices and details of each image display device, see, for example, "Electronic Display Devices (written by Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Chosenkai Co., Ltd., published in 1990)" and "Display Devices (written by Junaki Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho)". Co., Ltd., issued in 1989). Further, liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Kogyo Chosenkai Co., Ltd., published in 1994)". There is no particular restriction on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied, and for example, the present invention can be applied to various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology."

<化合物>
 本発明の化合物は、Cu、Zn、Pd又はNiに、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物である。

 式(1)中、Rは置換基を表し、XはCR又は窒素原子を表し、Rは水素原子又は置換基を表し、R及びRは結合して環構造を形成してもよく、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、窒素原子、CH又はCRを表し、Rは置換基を表し、R及びRの合計数が2以上である場合、R及びRのうち少なくとも2つは結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
 本発明の化合物は、金属原子種がCu、Zn、Pd又はNiに限定されている以外は、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる化合物Yと同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
<Compound>
The compound of the present invention is a compound in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to Cu, Zn, Pd, or Ni.

In formula (1), R 1 represents a substituent, X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom, R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure. X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.
The compound of the present invention is the same as the compound Y contained in the coloring composition of the present invention, except that the metal atomic species is limited to Cu, Zn, Pd, or Ni, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.

 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、以下に示す構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表し、Acはアセチル基を表す。 The present invention will be described in more detail with reference to Examples below. The materials, usage amounts, proportions, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. In addition, Me in the structural formula shown below represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Ph represents a phenyl group, and Ac represents an acetyl group.

<化合物Yの合成例>
(合成例1) 化合物(Y-1)の合成
 化合物(a-1)の1質量部に、1当量の化合物(b-1)と4質量部のメタノールを添加し、窒素気流下外温70℃で1時間加熱撹拌した。液温を30℃に冷却後、生成した固体を濾別した後に5質量部のメタノールで洗浄した。得られた固体を50℃で送風乾燥し、化合物(S-1)を1.2質量部得た。続いて、化合物(S-1)の1質量部に、1当量の酢酸亜鉛二水和物(Zn(OAc))と6質量部のN-エチルピロリドン(NEP)と6質量部のメタノールを混合して窒素気流下、外温80℃で2時間加熱撹拌した。続いて、酢酸エチルを13質量部滴下し、30分間加熱撹拌後、酢酸エチルを27質量部滴下し、1時間加熱撹拌した。液温を30℃に冷却後、生成した固体を濾別した後に10質量部の酢酸エチルと10質量部のアセトンで洗浄した。得られた固体を50℃で送風乾燥し、亜鉛原子に化合物(S-1)が配位した化合物である化合物(Y-1)を1.2質量部得た。化合物(Y-1)の質量スペクトルにおける(M+H)(posi)の値は302であった。化合物(Y-1)の極大吸収波長は波長350~500nmの範囲に存在していた。化合物(Y-1)の構造はH-NMRにより確認した。
H-NMR(pyridine-d5):7.60-7.50(2H、m)、7.45(1H、m)、7.32(1H,m)、7.16(1H、m)、6.68(1H、m)、6.57(1H、m)、3.01-2.96(2H、m)、2.86-2.80(2H、m).
<Synthesis example of compound Y>
(Synthesis Example 1) Synthesis of Compound (Y-1) To 1 part by mass of compound (a-1), 1 equivalent of compound (b-1) and 4 parts by mass of methanol were added, and the mixture was heated at an external temperature of 70°C under a nitrogen stream. The mixture was heated and stirred at ℃ for 1 hour. After cooling the liquid temperature to 30° C., the generated solid was filtered and washed with 5 parts by mass of methanol. The obtained solid was dried with air at 50° C. to obtain 1.2 parts by mass of compound (S-1). Subsequently, 1 equivalent of zinc acetate dihydrate (Zn(OAc) 2 ), 6 parts by mass of N-ethylpyrrolidone (NEP), and 6 parts by mass of methanol were added to 1 part by mass of compound (S-1). The mixture was mixed and heated and stirred at an external temperature of 80° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen stream. Subsequently, 13 parts by mass of ethyl acetate was added dropwise, and after heating and stirring for 30 minutes, 27 parts by mass of ethyl acetate was added dropwise, and the mixture was heated and stirred for 1 hour. After cooling the liquid temperature to 30° C., the produced solid was filtered and washed with 10 parts by mass of ethyl acetate and 10 parts by mass of acetone. The obtained solid was dried with air at 50° C. to obtain 1.2 parts by mass of compound (Y-1), which is a compound in which compound (S-1) was coordinated to a zinc atom. The (M+H) (posi) value in the mass spectrum of compound (Y-1) was 302. The maximum absorption wavelength of compound (Y-1) existed in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm. The structure of compound (Y-1) was confirmed by 1 H-NMR.
1 H-NMR (pyridine-d5): 7.60-7.50 (2H, m), 7.45 (1H, m), 7.32 (1H, m), 7.16 (1H, m), 6.68 (1H, m), 6.57 (1H, m), 3.01-2.96 (2H, m), 2.86-2.80 (2H, m).

(合成例2~9、16) 化合物(Y-2)~化合物(Y-9)、及び化合物(Y―16)の合成
 合成例1における化合物(a-1)及び化合物(b-1)を、それぞれ下記表の化合物(a)の欄及び化合物(b)の欄に記載の化合物に変更し、かつ、酢酸亜鉛二水和物を酢酸銅一水和物、酢酸パラジウム、酢酸ニッケル四水和物、塩基性酢酸アルミニウム、チタンテトライソプロポキシド、酢酸コバルト四水和物、酢酸マンガン四水和物、又は酢酸鉄に変更した以外は合成例1と同様の操作を実施し、化合物(Y-2)~化合物(Y-9)、及び化合物(Y―16)を合成した。化合物(Y-2)~化合物(Y-9)、及び化合物(Y―16)は、下記表の金属原子の欄に記載の金属原子に下記表の化合物Sの欄に記載の化合物が配位した化合物である。化合物(Y-2)~化合物(Y-9)、及び化合物(Y―16)の極大吸収波長は波長350~600nmの範囲に存在していた。
(Synthesis Examples 2 to 9, 16) Synthesis of Compound (Y-2) to Compound (Y-9) and Compound (Y-16) Compound (a-1) and compound (b-1) in Synthesis Example 1 were , respectively, and replaced zinc acetate dihydrate with copper acetate monohydrate, palladium acetate, and nickel acetate tetrahydrate. The same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 was carried out except that the compound (Y- 2) - Compound (Y-9) and compound (Y-16) were synthesized. Compounds (Y-2) to (Y-9) and Compound (Y-16) are compounds in which the compound listed in the Compound S column in the table below coordinates with the metal atom listed in the Metal Atom column in the table below. It is a compound that The maximum absorption wavelengths of Compound (Y-2) to Compound (Y-9) and Compound (Y-16) were in the wavelength range of 350 to 600 nm.

(合成例10-15、17―29)化合物(Y-10)~化合物(Y-15)、及び化合物(Y-17)~化合物(Y-29)の合成
 合成例1における化合物(a-1)及び化合物(b-1)を、それぞれ下記表の化合物(a)の欄及び化合物(b)の欄に記載の化合物に変更し、かつ、酢酸亜鉛二水和物を酢酸銅一水和物に変更する以外は合成例1と同様の操作を行い、化合物(Y-10)~化合物(Y-15)、及び化合物(Y-17)~化合物(Y-29)を合成した。化合物(Y-10)~化合物(Y-15)、及び化合物(Y-17)~化合物(Y-29)は、銅原子に下記表の化合物Sの欄に記載の化合物が配位した化合物である。化合物(Y-10)~化合物(Y-15)、及び化合物(Y-17)~化合物(Y-29)の極大吸収波長は波長350~600nmの範囲に存在していた。
(Synthesis Examples 10-15, 17-29) Synthesis of Compound (Y-10) to Compound (Y-15) and Compound (Y-17) to Compound (Y-29) Compound (a-1) in Synthesis Example 1 ) and compound (b-1) were changed to the compounds described in the compound (a) column and compound (b) column of the table below, respectively, and zinc acetate dihydrate was replaced with copper acetate monohydrate. Compound (Y-10) to Compound (Y-15) and Compound (Y-17) to Compound (Y-29) were synthesized by carrying out the same operation as in Synthesis Example 1 except for changing to. Compounds (Y-10) to Compounds (Y-15) and Compounds (Y-17) to Compounds (Y-29) are compounds in which the compound described in the compound S column of the table below is coordinated to the copper atom. be. The maximum absorption wavelengths of Compound (Y-10) to Compound (Y-15) and Compound (Y-17) to Compound (Y-29) were in the wavelength range of 350 to 600 nm.

(合成例30)化合物(Y-30)
文献(Heterocycl. Commun. 2006, 12, 427)に記載の手法に従い、化合物(a-1)及び化合物(b-1)から、化合物(S-21)を合成した。続いて、化合物(S-21)の1質量部に、1当量の酢酸銅一水和物(Cu(OAc))と6質量部のN-エチルピロリドン(NEP)と6質量部のメタノールを混合して窒素気流下、外温80℃で2時間加熱撹拌した。続いて、酢酸エチルを13質量部滴下し、30分間加熱撹拌後、酢酸エチルを27質量部滴下し、1時間加熱撹拌した。液温を30℃に冷却後、生成した固体を濾別した後に10質量部の酢酸エチルと10質量部のアセトンで洗浄した。得られた固体を50℃で送風乾燥し、銅原子に化合物(S-21)が配位した化合物である化合物(Y-30)を1.1質量部得た。化合物(Y-30)の質量スペクトルにおける(M+H)(posi)の値は292であった。化合物(Y-30)の極大吸収波長は波長350~500nmの範囲に存在していた。
(Synthesis Example 30) Compound (Y-30)
Compound (S-21) was synthesized from compound (a-1) and compound (b-1) according to the method described in the literature (Heterocycl. Commun. 2006, 12, 427). Subsequently, 1 equivalent of copper acetate monohydrate (Cu(OAc) 2 ), 6 parts by mass of N-ethylpyrrolidone (NEP), and 6 parts by mass of methanol were added to 1 part by mass of compound (S-21). The mixture was mixed and heated and stirred at an external temperature of 80° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen stream. Subsequently, 13 parts by mass of ethyl acetate was added dropwise, and after heating and stirring for 30 minutes, 27 parts by mass of ethyl acetate was added dropwise, and the mixture was heated and stirred for 1 hour. After cooling the liquid temperature to 30° C., the produced solid was filtered and washed with 10 parts by mass of ethyl acetate and 10 parts by mass of acetone. The obtained solid was dried with air at 50° C. to obtain 1.1 parts by mass of compound (Y-30), which is a compound in which compound (S-21) was coordinated to a copper atom. The (M+H) (posi) value in the mass spectrum of compound (Y-30) was 292. The maximum absorption wavelength of compound (Y-30) existed in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm.

(合成例31-33)化合物(Y-31)~化合物(Y-33)の合成
 合成例30における化合物(a-1)及び化合物(b-1)を、それぞれ下記表の化合物(a)の欄及び化合物(b)の欄に記載の化合物に変更する以外は合成例30と同様の操作を行い、化合物(Y-31)~化合物(Y-33)を合成した。化合物(Y-31)~化合物(Y-33)は、銅原子に下記表の化合物Sの欄に記載の化合物が配位した化合物である。化合物(Y-31)~化合物(Y-33)の極大吸収波長は波長350~500nmの範囲に存在していた。
(Synthesis Example 31-33) Synthesis of Compounds (Y-31) to Compounds (Y-33) Compound (a-1) and compound (b-1) in Synthesis Example 30 were converted to compound (a) in the table below, respectively. Compounds (Y-31) to (Y-33) were synthesized by performing the same operations as in Synthesis Example 30 except for changing the compounds described in the column and compound (b) column. Compounds (Y-31) to (Y-33) are compounds in which the compound described in the compound S column of the table below is coordinated to a copper atom. The maximum absorption wavelengths of compounds (Y-31) to (Y-33) existed in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm.

(合成例40-46)化合物(Y-40)~化合物(Y-46)の合成
 合成例1における化合物(a-1)及び化合物(b-1)を、それぞれ下記表の化合物(a)の欄及び化合物(b)の欄に記載の化合物に変更し、かつ、酢酸亜鉛二水和物を酢酸銅一水和物に変更する以外は合成例1と同様の操作を行い、化合物(Y-40)~化合物(Y-46)を合成した。化合物(Y-40)~化合物(Y-46)は、銅原子に下記表の化合物Sの欄に記載の化合物が配位した化合物である。化合物(Y-40)~化合物(Y-46)の極大吸収波長は波長350~500nmの範囲に存在していた。
(Synthesis Example 40-46) Synthesis of Compounds (Y-40) to Compounds (Y-46) Compound (a-1) and compound (b-1) in Synthesis Example 1 were converted to compound (a) in the table below, respectively. Compound (Y- 40) - Compound (Y-46) was synthesized. Compounds (Y-40) to (Y-46) are compounds in which a compound described in the compound S column of the table below is coordinated to a copper atom. The maximum absorption wavelengths of Compound (Y-40) to Compound (Y-46) existed in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm.

(合成例y-1)化合物(y-1)の合成
 合成例1における化合物(a-1)および化合物(b-1)を、それぞれ下記表の化合物(a)の欄および化合物(b)の欄に記載の化合物に変更し、かつ、酢酸亜鉛二水和物を塩基性酢酸アルミニウムに変更する以外は合成例1と同様の操作を行い、化合物(y-1)を合成した。化合物(y-1)は、アルミニウム原子に下記表の化合物Sの欄に記載の化合物が配位した化合物である。化合物(y-1)の質量スペクトルにおける(M+H)(posi)の値は688であった。化合物(y-1)の極大吸収波長は波長350~600nmの範囲に存在していた。
 化合物y-1は式(1)には該当しない化合物である。
(Synthesis Example y-1) Synthesis of Compound (y-1) Compound (a-1) and Compound (b-1) in Synthesis Example 1 were added to the column for compound (a) and the column for compound (b) in the table below, respectively. Compound (y-1) was synthesized by carrying out the same operation as in Synthesis Example 1 except for changing the compound described in the column and changing zinc acetate dihydrate to basic aluminum acetate. Compound (y-1) is a compound in which the aluminum atom is coordinated with the compound described in the column of compound S in the table below. The (M+H) (posi) value in the mass spectrum of compound (y-1) was 688. The maximum absorption wavelength of compound (y-1) existed in the wavelength range of 350 to 600 nm.
Compound y-1 is a compound that does not correspond to formula (1).

<分散液の製造>
 下記表に記載の原料を混合した混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.1mm径)を用いて3時間混合及び分散した。次いで、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて圧力2000kg/cm及び流量500g/minの条件の下、分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を全10回繰り返して、分散液を得た。なお、以下の表において、顔料、顔料誘導体、分散剤及び重合禁止剤の配合量の値は固形分換算での値である。
 また、「顔料」の「混練研磨処理」の欄に「あり」と記載された例においては、以下の条件で混練研磨処理を行った。
(混練研磨処理条件)
 顔料5.3質量部、摩砕剤74.7質量部および粘結剤14質量部をラボプラストミル((株)東洋精機製作所製)に添加し、装置中の混練物の温度が70℃になるように温度コントロールして、2時間混練した。摩砕剤は中性無水芒硝E(平均粒子径(体積基準の50%径(D50))=20μm、三田尻化学製)、粘結剤はジエチレングリコールを使用した。混練研磨後の混練物を、24℃の水10Lで水洗処理して摩砕剤および粘結剤を取り除き、加熱オーブンで80℃24時間の処理を行った。
<Production of dispersion>
A mixture of the raw materials listed in the table below was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours using a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.1 mm in diameter). Next, dispersion treatment was performed using a high-pressure dispersion machine NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a pressure reduction mechanism under conditions of a pressure of 2000 kg/cm 2 and a flow rate of 500 g/min. This dispersion treatment was repeated a total of 10 times to obtain a dispersion liquid. In the table below, the amounts of pigments, pigment derivatives, dispersants, and polymerization inhibitors are calculated in terms of solid content.
In addition, in the examples described as "Yes" in the "Kneading and polishing treatment" column of "Pigment", the kneading and polishing treatment was performed under the following conditions.
(Kneading and polishing treatment conditions)
5.3 parts by mass of pigment, 74.7 parts by mass of grinding agent, and 14 parts by mass of binder were added to Laboplast Mill (manufactured by Toyo Seiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.), and the temperature of the kneaded material in the device was brought to 70°C. The mixture was kneaded for 2 hours while the temperature was controlled so that the mixture was mixed. As the grinding agent, neutral anhydrous sodium sulfate E (average particle diameter (50% diameter on a volume basis (D50)) = 20 μm, manufactured by Mitajiri Chemical Co., Ltd.) was used, and as the binder, diethylene glycol was used. The kneaded product after kneading and polishing was washed with 10 L of water at 24°C to remove the grinding agent and the binder, and then treated in a heating oven at 80°C for 24 hours.

 上記表の略語で記載の原料は以下の通りである。 The raw materials listed with abbreviations in the table above are as follows.

(着色剤)
 Y-1~Y-33、Y-40~Y-46、y-1:上述した化合物Y-1~Y-33、Y-40~Y-46、y-1
 Y-34~Y-39:下記化合物Sが、下記金属原子に配位した化合物
(colorant)
Y-1 to Y-33, Y-40 to Y-46, y-1: the above-mentioned compounds Y-1 to Y-33, Y-40 to Y-46, y-1
Y-34 to Y-39: Compounds in which the following compound S is coordinated to the following metal atom

PG36:C.I.ピグメントグリーン36(フタロシアニン化合物、緑色顔料)
PG58:C.I.ピグメントグリーン58(フタロシアニン化合物、緑色顔料)
PG63:特開2018-141894号公報に記載の(PG63-1)
G1:下記構造の化合物
PY138:C.I.ピグメントイエロー138(キノフタロン化合物、黄色顔料)
PY129:C.I.ピグメントイエロー129(アゾメチン化合物、黄色顔料)
PY185:C.I.ピグメントイエロー185(イソインドリン化合物、黄色顔料)

PR122:C.I.ピグメントレッド122(キナクリドン化合物、赤色顔料)
PR177:C.I.ピグメントレッド177(アントラキノン化合物、赤色顔料)
PR224:C.I.ピグメントレッド224(ペリレン化合物、赤色顔料)
PR254:C.I.ピグメントレッド254(ジケトピロロピロール化合物、赤色顔料)
PR264:C.I.ピグメントレッド264(ジケトピロロピロール化合物、赤色顔料)
PR272:C.I.ピグメントレッド272(ジケトピロロピロール化合物、赤色顔料)
 
 
PG36:C. I. Pigment Green 36 (phthalocyanine compound, green pigment)
PG58:C. I. Pigment Green 58 (phthalocyanine compound, green pigment)
PG63: (PG63-1) described in JP 2018-141894 Publication
G1: Compound with the following structure PY138:C. I. Pigment Yellow 138 (quinophthalone compound, yellow pigment)
PY129:C. I. Pigment Yellow 129 (azomethine compound, yellow pigment)
PY185:C. I. Pigment Yellow 185 (isoindoline compound, yellow pigment)
)
PR122:C. I. Pigment Red 122 (quinacridone compound, red pigment)
PR177:C. I. Pigment Red 177 (anthraquinone compound, red pigment)
PR224:C. I. Pigment Red 224 (perylene compound, red pigment)
PR254:C. I. Pigment Red 254 (diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, red pigment)
PR264:C. I. Pigment Red 264 (diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, red pigment)
PR272:C. I. Pigment Red 272 (diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, red pigment)

(顔料誘導体)
 A1:下記構造の化合物
(pigment derivative)
A1: Compound with the following structure

(分散剤)
D1:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量24000
D2:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量11000
D3:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量17000
D4:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量7000
D5:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量16000
D6:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量10000
D7:特許6432077号公報に記載のブロックポリマーEB-1
D8:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量11000
D9:DISPERBYK(登録商標)-142(ビックケミー社製)
D10:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量6000
D11:下記構造の化合物、重量平均分子量7000
下記構造中、主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。

 
(dispersant)
D1: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 24,000
D2: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 11000
D3: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 17,000
D4: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 7000
D5: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 16,000
D6: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 10,000
D7: Block polymer EB-1 described in Patent No. 6432077
D8: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 11000
D9: DISPERBYK (registered trademark)-142 (manufactured by BYK Chemie)
D10: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 6000
D11: Compound with the following structure, weight average molecular weight 7000
In the structure below, the numerical value appended to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value appended to the side chain is the number of repeating units.


(溶剤)
S1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
S2:シクロヘキサノン
S3:酢酸ブチル
S4:乳酸エチル(EL)
S5:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
S6:シクロペンタノン
(solvent)
S1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
S2: Cyclohexanone S3: Butyl acetate S4: Ethyl lactate (EL)
S5: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
S6: Cyclopentanone

(重合禁止剤)
H1:p-メトキシフェノール
(Polymerization inhibitor)
H1: p-methoxyphenol

(評価)
<経時増粘率の評価>
 得られた分散液を、45℃の温度で、7日間で加熱した。加熱前後の顔料分散液の粘度を測定し、加熱前の分散液の粘度と加熱後の分散液の粘度の差の絶対値を算出した。分散液の粘度は、粘度計(TV-22型粘度計、コーンプレートタイプ、東機産業(株)製)を用いて測定した。なお、分散液の粘度の測定は、顔料分散液の温度を25℃に温度調整して行った。下記式より、経時増粘率を算出し、以下の基準で経時増粘率を評価した。評価結果は表の「経時増粘率」の欄に記載した。
 経時増粘率(%)=|加熱前の分散液の粘度―加熱後の分散液の粘度|/加熱前の分散液の粘度×100
 A:経時増粘率が5%未満であった。
 B:経時増粘率が5%以上15%未満であった。
 C:経時増粘率が15%以上25%未満であった。 D:経時増粘率が25%以上であった。
(evaluation)
<Evaluation of viscosity increase rate over time>
The resulting dispersion was heated at a temperature of 45° C. for 7 days. The viscosity of the pigment dispersion before and after heating was measured, and the absolute value of the difference between the viscosity of the dispersion before and after heating was calculated. The viscosity of the dispersion liquid was measured using a viscometer (TV-22 viscometer, cone plate type, manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.). The viscosity of the dispersion liquid was measured by adjusting the temperature of the pigment dispersion liquid to 25°C. The rate of viscosity increase over time was calculated from the following formula, and the rate of viscosity increase over time was evaluated based on the following criteria. The evaluation results are listed in the "Thickening rate over time" column of the table.
Viscosity increase over time (%) = | Viscosity of dispersion before heating - Viscosity of dispersion after heating | / Viscosity of dispersion before heating × 100
A: The rate of increase in viscosity over time was less than 5%.
B: The rate of increase in viscosity over time was 5% or more and less than 15%.
C: The rate of increase in viscosity over time was 15% or more and less than 25%. D: The rate of increase in viscosity over time was 25% or more.

<着色組成物の製造>
 各実施例又は比較例において、下記の表に記載の原料を混合して、着色組成物又は比較用組成物を製造した。
<Manufacture of colored composition>
In each Example or Comparative Example, the raw materials listed in the table below were mixed to produce a colored composition or a comparative composition.

 上記表の略語で記載の原料は以下の通りである。 The raw materials listed with abbreviations in the table above are as follows.

(分散液)
 分散液G1~G75、Y1、R1~R6、g1:上述した分散液G1~G75、Y1、R1~R6、g1
(Dispersion liquid)
Dispersions G1 to G75, Y1, R1 to R6, g1: Dispersions G1 to G75, Y1, R1 to R6, g1 described above

(バインダー)
 D1~3、D8:上述した分散剤D1~D3、D8で示した樹脂
(binder)
D1-3, D8: Resin shown by the above-mentioned dispersant D1-D3, D8

(重合性モノマー)
 M1:下記構造の化合物の混合物(左側化合物(6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と右側化合物(5官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)とのモル比が7:3の混合物)

 M2:下記構造の化合物

 M3:下記構造の化合物

 M4:コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(酸価67mgKOH/g)
 M5:下記構造の化合物。括弧に付記した数値は繰返し数を表す。

M6:下記構造の化合物
(Polymerizable monomer)
M1: A mixture of compounds with the following structure (a mixture in which the molar ratio of the compound on the left (a hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and the compound on the right (a pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) is 7:3)

M2: Compound with the following structure

M3: Compound with the following structure

M4: Succinic acid modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (acid value 67mgKOH/g)
M5: Compound with the following structure. The numbers in parentheses represent the number of repetitions.

M6: Compound with the following structure

(光重合開始剤)
 F1~F6:下記構造の化合物
(Photopolymerization initiator)
F1 to F6: Compounds with the following structure

(界面活性剤)
 W1:下記構造の化合物(重量平均分子量14000)。下記の式中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。(フッ素系界面活性剤)

 W2:下記構造の化合物(重量平均分子量3000)。nは繰返し数を表す。
(surfactant)
W1: Compound with the following structure (weight average molecular weight 14,000). In the formula below, % indicating the proportion of repeating units is mol%. (Fluorine surfactant)

W2: Compound with the following structure (weight average molecular weight 3000). n represents the number of repetitions.

(重合禁止剤)
 H1:上述の重合禁止剤H1
(Polymerization inhibitor)
H1: the above polymerization inhibitor H1

(紫外線吸収剤)
 UV1~UV2:下記構造の化合物
(Ultraviolet absorber)
UV1 to UV2: Compounds with the following structure

(酸化防止剤)
 I1:下記構造の化合物
(Antioxidant)
I1: Compound with the following structure

(エポキシ化合物)
 I1:2,2-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物
(epoxy compound)
I1: 1,2-epoxy-4-(2-oxiranyl)cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis(hydroxymethyl)-1-butanol

(溶剤)
S1~S6:上述の溶剤S1~S6
(solvent)
S1 to S6: the above-mentioned solvents S1 to S6

(評価)
<耐湿性の評価>
 ガラス基板上に、乾燥膜厚が0.1μmとなるようにCT-4000L溶液(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製;透明下地剤)を塗布し、乾燥させて、透明膜を形成した後、220℃で5分間加熱処理を行なった。次いで、各着色組成物をプリベーク後の膜厚が0.6μmとなるようにスピンコート法で塗布した。次いで、ホットプレートを用い、100℃で2分間プリベークした。次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を使用して365nmの波長の光を500mJ/cmの露光量で露光して膜を製造した。次いで、ガラス基板をスピン・シャワー現像機(DW-30型、(株)ケミトロニクス製)の水平回転テーブル上に載置し、CD-2000(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)を用いて23℃で60秒間パドル現像し、回転装置によって上記ガラス基板を回転数50r.p.m.(revolutions per minute)で回転させつつ、その回転中心の上方より純水を噴出ノズルからシャワー状に供給してリンス処理を行ない、その後200℃で3分間ポストベークして膜を製造した。ただし、実施例101においては、上記露光、現像及びポストベークを省略し、プリベーク後に得られた膜をそのまま耐湿性試験に使用した。得られた膜について、恒温恒湿器(ヤマダ科学(株)製、IW222)を用いて、温度110℃、相対湿度85%の雰囲気下において、96時間放置する耐湿性試験を行った。
 耐湿性試験前後の膜のそれぞれについて、分光光度計(UV3600、島津製作所製、レファレンス:ガラス基板)を用いて波長300~800nmの範囲の透過率を測定し、|[(耐湿性試験前の膜の透過率(%)-耐湿性試験後の膜の透過率(%))/耐湿性試験前の膜の透過率(%)]×100|(%)で表される透過性変化率を算出し、以下の基準で耐湿性を評価した。評価結果は表の「耐湿性」の欄に記載した。
 A:波長300~800nmの全領域において透過率変動が2%未満であった。
 B:波長300~800nmの全領域において透過率変動が5%未満であり、かつ、少なくとも一部の波長での透過率変動が2%以上5%未満であった。
 C:波長300~800nmの全領域において、透過率変動が10%未満であり、かつ、少なくとも一部の波長での透過率変動が5%以上10%未満であった。
 D:波長300~800nmの少なくとも一部において、透過率変動が10%以上であった。
(evaluation)
<Evaluation of moisture resistance>
After applying CT-4000L solution (manufactured by Fujifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.; transparent base agent) on a glass substrate so that the dry film thickness is 0.1 μm and drying it to form a transparent film, Heat treatment was performed at 220°C for 5 minutes. Next, each coloring composition was applied by spin coating so that the film thickness after prebaking was 0.6 μm. Then, using a hot plate, it was prebaked at 100°C for 2 minutes. Next, using an i-line stepper exposure device FPA-3000i5+ (manufactured by Canon Inc.), the film was exposed to light having a wavelength of 365 nm at an exposure dose of 500 mJ/cm 2 to produce a film. Next, the glass substrate was placed on the horizontal rotary table of a spin shower developing machine (Model DW-30, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and developed using a CD-2000 (manufactured by Fujifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.). Paddle development was performed at 23° C. for 60 seconds, and the glass substrate was rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm using a rotating device. p. m. While rotating at revolutions per minute (revolutions per minute), pure water was supplied from above the center of rotation in the form of a shower from a jet nozzle to perform rinsing treatment, followed by post-baking at 200° C. for 3 minutes to produce a film. However, in Example 101, the above-mentioned exposure, development, and post-baking were omitted, and the film obtained after pre-baking was used as it was for the moisture resistance test. The obtained film was subjected to a humidity resistance test in which it was left to stand for 96 hours in an atmosphere of a temperature of 110° C. and a relative humidity of 85% using a constant temperature and humidity chamber (manufactured by Yamada Kagaku Co., Ltd., IW222).
For each film before and after the moisture resistance test, the transmittance in the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm was measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3600, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, reference: glass substrate). Transmittance (%) - Transmittance of membrane after moisture resistance test (%)) / Transmittance of membrane before moisture resistance test (%)] × 100 | Calculate the rate of change in permeability expressed as (%) The moisture resistance was evaluated using the following criteria. The evaluation results are listed in the "Moisture resistance" column of the table.
A: The transmittance variation was less than 2% in the entire wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm.
B: The transmittance variation was less than 5% in the entire wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm, and the transmittance variation in at least some wavelengths was 2% or more and less than 5%.
C: The transmittance variation was less than 10% in the entire wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm, and the transmittance variation in at least some wavelengths was 5% or more and less than 10%.
D: The transmittance variation was 10% or more in at least a part of the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm.

 上記表に示すように、実施例の着色組成物は耐湿性に優れた膜を形成することができた。実施例の着色組成物から形成した膜は、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置に好適に使用できる。 As shown in the table above, the colored compositions of Examples were able to form films with excellent moisture resistance. Films formed from the colored compositions of Examples can be suitably used for optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices.

Claims (11)

 着色剤と、
 樹脂と、
 溶剤とを含み、
 前記着色剤は、金属原子に式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Yを含む
 着色組成物。

 式(1)中、Rは置換基を表し、XはCR又は窒素原子を表し、Rは水素原子又は置換基を表し、R及びRは結合して環構造を形成してもよく、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、窒素原子、CH又はCRを表し、Rは置換基を表し、R及びRの合計数が2以上である場合、R及びRのうち少なくとも2つは結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
colorant and
resin and
containing a solvent,
The coloring composition includes a compound Y in which the compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.

In formula (1), R 1 represents a substituent, X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom, R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure. X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.
 前記XがCRであって前記R及び前記Rが結合して環構造を形成しているか、又は、前記Rがアリール基、アラルキル基又は炭素数2以上のアルキル基である、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The X 2 is CR 2 and the R 1 and the R 2 are bonded to form a ring structure, or the R 1 is an aryl group, an aralkyl group, or an alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms. The colored composition according to claim 1.  前記Rが、酸素原子又は窒素原子を含む置換基である、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to claim 1, wherein R 1 is a substituent containing an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.  前記金属原子は、Cu、Zn、Ni、Pd、Ti、Mn、Co、Al又はFeを含む、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the metal atom includes Cu, Zn, Ni, Pd, Ti, Mn, Co, Al, or Fe.  緑色着色剤及び赤色着色剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種を更に含む、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising at least one selected from a green colorant and a red colorant.  重合開始剤、及び、重合性化合物を更に含む、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound.  カラーフィルタ形成用である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, which is used for forming a color filter.  請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。 A film obtained from the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3.  請求項8に記載の膜を有するカラーフィルタ。 A color filter comprising the film according to claim 8. 請求項9に記載のカラーフィルタを有する、固体撮像素子又は画像表示装置。 A solid-state image sensor or an image display device, comprising the color filter according to claim 9.  Cu、Zn、Pd又はNiに、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している
 化合物。

 式(1)中、Rは置換基を表し、XはCR又は窒素原子を表し、Rは水素原子又は置換基を表し、R及びRは結合して環構造を形成してもよく、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に、窒素原子、CH又はCRを表し、Rは置換基を表し、R及びRの合計数が2以上である場合、R及びRのうち少なくとも2つは結合して環構造を形成してもよい。
A compound in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to Cu, Zn, Pd, or Ni.

In formula (1), R 1 represents a substituent, X 2 represents CR 2 or a nitrogen atom, R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 1 and R 2 combine to form a ring structure. X 3 to X 9 each independently represent a nitrogen atom, CH or CR x , R x represents a substituent, and when the total number of R 2 and R x is 2 or more, R 2 and At least two of R x may be combined to form a ring structure.
PCT/JP2023/024884 2022-07-07 2023-07-05 Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound Ceased WO2024010025A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2024532604A JPWO2024010025A1 (en) 2022-07-07 2023-07-05

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022109737 2022-07-07
JP2022-109737 2022-07-07

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024010025A1 true WO2024010025A1 (en) 2024-01-11

Family

ID=89453451

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/024884 Ceased WO2024010025A1 (en) 2022-07-07 2023-07-05 Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2024010025A1 (en)
TW (1) TW202409209A (en)
WO (1) WO2024010025A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004158391A (en) * 2002-11-08 2004-06-03 Sharp Corp Organic electroluminescent device
WO2008123294A1 (en) * 2007-03-29 2008-10-16 Nippon Steel Chemical Co., Ltd. Composition for color filter and color filter
JP2009035671A (en) * 2007-08-03 2009-02-19 Toray Ind Inc Pigment dispersion, colorant composition, and color filter
JP2011128181A (en) * 2009-12-15 2011-06-30 Toray Ind Inc Green-color colorant composition for color filter, color filter base substrate, and liquid crystal display device
JP2018123190A (en) * 2017-01-30 2018-08-09 Dic株式会社 Azomethine zinc complex
WO2022168741A1 (en) * 2021-02-03 2022-08-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004158391A (en) * 2002-11-08 2004-06-03 Sharp Corp Organic electroluminescent device
WO2008123294A1 (en) * 2007-03-29 2008-10-16 Nippon Steel Chemical Co., Ltd. Composition for color filter and color filter
JP2009035671A (en) * 2007-08-03 2009-02-19 Toray Ind Inc Pigment dispersion, colorant composition, and color filter
JP2011128181A (en) * 2009-12-15 2011-06-30 Toray Ind Inc Green-color colorant composition for color filter, color filter base substrate, and liquid crystal display device
JP2018123190A (en) * 2017-01-30 2018-08-09 Dic株式会社 Azomethine zinc complex
WO2022168741A1 (en) * 2021-02-03 2022-08-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DAGA KAILASH, SHARMA SHOBHA, MEHTA, R K: " Synthesis and characterization of divalent cobalt, nickel, copper, zinc and cadmium and uranyl and vanadyl chelates with N-o-hydroxyacetophenone-imine-o-aminophenol", JOURNAL OF CHEMISTRY, SECTION A: INORGANIC, PHYSICAL, THEORETICAL & ANALYTICAL, vol. 25A, 1 August 1986 (1986-08-01), pages 782 - 784, XP093125784 *
MISHRA A.P., MISHRA R.K., SHRIVASTAVA S.P.: "Structural and antimicrobial studies of coordination compounds of VO(II), Co(II), Ni(II) and Cu(II) with some Schiff bases involving 2-amino-4-chlorophenol", JOURNAL OF THE SERBIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, SERBIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, BELGRADE, vol. 74, no. 5, 1 January 2009 (2009-01-01), Belgrade , pages 523 - 535, XP093125773, ISSN: 0352-5139, DOI: 10.2298/JSC0905523M *
SINGH, P. ET AL.: "Schiff bases as chelating agents for nickel(II)", JOURNAL OF THE INDIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, INDIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, IN, vol. 57, no. 10, 1 January 1980 (1980-01-01), IN , pages 1025 - 1027, XP009552360, ISSN: 0019-4522 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2024010025A1 (en) 2024-01-11
TW202409209A (en) 2024-03-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2024190447A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
CN116848199A (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device and compound
KR102790553B1 (en) Coloring compositions, films, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, image display devices and compounds
WO2023243414A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2024010025A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2024018910A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device and coloring agent
JP7620639B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, structure, color filter and display device
JP7752627B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, optical sensor and display device
WO2023228791A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2024048337A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2024166734A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2024043147A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2024070694A1 (en) Composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, camera module, and compound
WO2024058001A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2024018941A1 (en) Resin composition, membrane, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, optical sensor, and camera module
WO2024014300A1 (en) Resin composition, method for producing resin composition, pigment derivative, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP2024039687A (en) Compositions, films, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, compounds and infrared absorbers
WO2024262354A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2024171841A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2024262356A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2024057998A1 (en) Composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, camera module, compound, and infrared absorbing agent
WO2024142976A1 (en) Composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, camera module, and compound
WO2024171839A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2024135427A1 (en) Method for producing optical filter and method for producing solid-state imaging element
WO2024143018A1 (en) Light-sensitive composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, camera module, and compound

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23835556

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2024532604

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 23835556

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1